WO2007117591A2 - Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof - Google Patents

Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007117591A2
WO2007117591A2 PCT/US2007/008562 US2007008562W WO2007117591A2 WO 2007117591 A2 WO2007117591 A2 WO 2007117591A2 US 2007008562 W US2007008562 W US 2007008562W WO 2007117591 A2 WO2007117591 A2 WO 2007117591A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
formula
salt
alkyl
group
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2007/008562
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2007117591A3 (en
WO2007117591A9 (en
Inventor
Taotao Ling
Venkata Rami Reddy Macherla
Barbara Christine Potts
Rama Rao Manam
Katherine Mcarthur
Original Assignee
Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to CN2007800188644A priority Critical patent/CN101460457B/en
Priority to MX2008012847A priority patent/MX2008012847A/en
Priority to JP2009504312A priority patent/JP2009532484A/en
Priority to AU2007235323A priority patent/AU2007235323C1/en
Priority to BRPI0709474-4A priority patent/BRPI0709474A2/en
Priority to EP07754986A priority patent/EP2013167B1/en
Priority to CA002648317A priority patent/CA2648317A1/en
Priority to NZ572026A priority patent/NZ572026A/en
Application filed by Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. filed Critical Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
Publication of WO2007117591A2 publication Critical patent/WO2007117591A2/en
Publication of WO2007117591A3 publication Critical patent/WO2007117591A3/en
Priority to IL194507A priority patent/IL194507A0/en
Publication of WO2007117591A9 publication Critical patent/WO2007117591A9/en
Priority to ZA2008/09305A priority patent/ZA200809305B/en
Priority to HK09105747.6A priority patent/HK1128279A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D207/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D207/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D207/18—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member
    • C07D207/22—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D207/24—Oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D207/26—2-Pyrrolidones
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D491/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C07D491/044—Ortho-condensed systems with only one oxygen atom as ring hetero atom in the oxygen-containing ring
    • C07D491/048—Ortho-condensed systems with only one oxygen atom as ring hetero atom in the oxygen-containing ring the oxygen-containing ring being five-membered
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D207/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D207/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D207/18—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member
    • C07D207/22—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D207/24—Oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D207/26—2-Pyrrolidones
    • C07D207/273—2-Pyrrolidones with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to other ring carbon atoms
    • C07D207/277—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C07D207/28—2-Pyrrolidone-5- carboxylic acids; Functional derivatives thereof, e.g. esters, nitriles
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D263/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings
    • C07D263/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D263/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D491/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D498/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D498/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D498/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02P—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P20/00—Technologies relating to chemical industry
    • Y02P20/50—Improvements relating to the production of bulk chemicals
    • Y02P20/55—Design of synthesis routes, e.g. reducing the use of auxiliary or protecting groups

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to certain compounds and to methods for the preparation of certain compounds that can be used in the fields of chemistry and medicine.
  • Cancer is a leading cause of death in the United States. Despite significant efforts to find new approaches for treating cancer, the primary treatment options remain surgery, chemotherapy and radiation therapy, either alone or in combination. Surgery and radiation therapy, however, are generally useful only for fairly defined types of cancer, and are of limited use for treating patients with disseminated disease.
  • Chemotherapy is the method that is generally useful in treating patients with metastatic cancer or diffuse cancers such as leukemias. Although chemotherapy can provide a therapeutic benefit, it often fails to result in cure of the disease due to the patient's cancer cells becoming resistant to the chemotherapeutic agent. Due, in part, to the likelihood of cancer cells becoming resistant to a chemotherapeutic agent, such agents are commonly used in combination to treat patients.
  • infectious diseases caused, for example, by bacteria, fungi and protozoa are becoming increasingly difficult to treat and cure.
  • bacteria, fungi and protozoa are developing resistance to current antibiotics and chemotherapeutic agents.
  • examples of such microbes include Bacillus, Leishmania, Plasmodium and Trypanosoma.
  • Marine-derived natural products are a rich source of potential new anticancer agents and anti-microbial agents.
  • the oceans are massively complex and house a diverse assemblage of microbes that occur in environments of extreme variations in pressure, salinity, and temperature.
  • Marine microorganisms have therefore developed unique metabolic and physiological capabilities that not only ensure survival in extreme and varied habitats, but also offer the potential to produce metabolites that would not be observed from terrestrial microorganisms (Okami, Y. 1993 J Mar Biotechnol 1:59).
  • Representative structural classes of such metabolites include terpenes, peptides, polyketides, and compounds with mixed biosynthetic origins.
  • the embodiments disclosed herein generally relate to the total synthesis of chemical compounds, including heterocyclic compounds and analogs thereof. Some embodiments are directed to the chemical compound and intermediate compounds. Other embodiments are directed to the individual methods of synthesizing the chemical compound and intermediate compounds.
  • An embodiment disclosed herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (V):
  • Another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing an intermediate compound of formula (X).
  • Still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing an intermediate compound of formula (XV).
  • One embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (V).
  • Another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (VI).
  • Still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (X). [0017] Still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (Xp).
  • Yet still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XI).
  • One embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XV).
  • Another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XVII).
  • Still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XVIIp).
  • Yet still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XVIII).
  • One embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XXIII).
  • Some embodiments described herein relate to the individual methods of synthesizing compounds of .formula (III), (IV), (VI), (VI), (VII), (VIII), (IX), (X), (XV), (XVI), (XXII), (XXIII), (XXIV), (XXV), (XXVI), (XXVII), (XXVIII) and protected derivatives thereof.
  • One embodiment described herein relates to a method of forming a compound of formula (X) from a compound of formula (V) comprising the steps of: cleaving the carbon-carbon double bond of the compound of formula (V) and cyclizing the cleaved double bond with the tertiary hydroxy group; transforming -COOR 2 to an aldehyde; and adding R 4 to the aldehyde using an organometallic moiety containing at least one R 4 , wherein R 2 and R 4 are described herein [0027]
  • An embodiment described herein relates to a method of forming a compound of formula (XV) from a compound of formula (X) comprising the steps of: cleaving an aminal group; removing PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal; and forming a four membered lactone ring, wherein PGi can be a protecting group moiety described herien.
  • the cleaving of the aminal group can occur before the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, and before the formation of the four membered lactone ring. In other embodiments, the cleaving of the aminal group can occur after the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, but before the formation of the four membered ring.
  • Another embodiment described herein relates to a method of forming a compound of formula (XVII) from a compound of formula (V) comprising the steps of: cleaving the carbon-carbon double bond of the compound of formula (V) and cyclizing the cleaved double bond with the tertiary hydroxy group; and adding R 4 after cyclization with the tertiary hydroxy group using an organometallic moiety containing at least one R 4 , wherein R 4 is described herein;
  • a method of forming a compound of formula (XXII) from a compound of formula (XVII) comprising the steps of: cleaving an aminal group; removing PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal; forming a four membered ring via a lactonization reaction; and removing any protecting groups on a ketone, wherein PGi can be a protecting group moiety described herien.
  • the cleaving of the aminal group can occur before the removal of PGj and reductively opening the hemiacetal, and before the formation of the four membered ring via a lactonization reaction.
  • the cleaving of the aminal group is after the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, but before the formation of the four membered ring via a lactonization reaction.
  • Figure 1 shows the chemical structure of Salinosporamide A.
  • Figure 2 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (1-1 ) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 3 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the ester precursor to the compound of formula (II- 1 ) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 4 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the protected ester precursor of the compound of formula (II- 1) in CDCI 3 .
  • Figure 5 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (II- 1) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 6a shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (III- 1) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 6b shows a LC-MS of the compound of formula (III- 1 ).
  • Figure 7a shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IV- 1) in CDCI 3 .
  • Figure 7b shows a NOESY spectrum of the compound of formula (IV- 1) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 7c shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IV- IA) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 7d shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IV- IB) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 7e shows a LC-MS of the compound of formula (IV-I).
  • Figure 8 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IA) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 9 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IA) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 10 shows a 1 H- 1 H COSY NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V-IA) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 11 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (V- IA).
  • Figure 12 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (VI- 1) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 13 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (VII-Ia) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 14 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (VII-Ib) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 15 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (VII-
  • Figure 16 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (VIII-I b ) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 17 shows a 1 H NMR of the compound of formula (VIII-I 8 ) in CDCl 3
  • Figure 18 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IX- l b ) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 19 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IX- l a ) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 20 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- l b B) in CDCl 3
  • Figure 21 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- l b B) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 22 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (X- IbB).
  • Figure 23 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- l a B) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 24 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- I 3 B) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 25 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IB) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 26 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (V- IB).
  • Figure 27 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IC) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 28 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IC) In CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 29 shows a NOESY spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IC) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 30 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIX-I) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 31 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIX-I) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 32 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIII-IB) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 33 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIII-IB) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 34 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIV-IB-Bz) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 35 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXV-IB-Bz) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 36 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXV-IB-Bz) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 37 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVp- IB-Bz-TMS) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 38 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVp- IB-Bz-TMS) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 39 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVI-IB-Bz) in CD 3 OD.
  • Figure 40 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVI-IB-Bz) in CD 3 OD.
  • Figure 41 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVIII- IB-TBS) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 42 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XV- 1 B) in acetone-d 6 .
  • Figure 43 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XV-IB) in acetone-d 5 .
  • Figure 44 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XVI-IB) produced from the compound of formula (XV-IB) produced synthetically in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 45 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XVI-IB) produced from the compound of formula (XV-IB) produced synthetically in
  • Figure 46 shows 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXII-I) produced from the compound of formula (XVI-IB) obtained synthetically in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 47 shows 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XVI- IA) produced from the compound of formula (XXII-I) obtained synthetically in DMSO- d 6 .
  • Figure 48 shows a comparison of 1 H NMR spectra of compound (XVI- IA) produced synthetically and from fermentation.
  • Figure 49 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XVI-IA) produced from the compound of formula (XXII-I) obtained synthetically in DMSOd 6 .
  • Figure 50 shows a comparison of 13 C NMR spectra of compound (XVI-IA) produced synthetically and from fermentation.
  • Figure 51 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of cyclohexenyltributyltin in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 52 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- l a ) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 53 s shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X-l a ) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 54 shows a 1 H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- I b ) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 55 shows a 13 C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- Ib) in CDCl 3 .
  • Figure 56 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (X-
  • Figure 57 shows a plot of the inhibition of the chymotrypsin-like activity of 2OS proteasomes by the synthetic and fermentation compounds of formula (XVI-IA).
  • Figure 58 shows a plot of the inhibition of the trypsin-like activity of 2OS proteasomes by the synthetic and fermentation compounds of formula (XVI-IA).
  • Figure 59 shows a plot of the inhibition of the caspase-like activity of 2OS proteasomes by the synthetic and fermentation compounds of formula (XVI-IA).
  • Embodiments of the invention include, but are not limited to, methods for the preparation of various compounds and intermediates, and the compounds and intermediates themselves. In some embodiments, one or more substituents, one or more compounds, or groups of compounds can be specifically excluded in any one or more of the methods or compounds as described more fully below.
  • Salinosporamide A and its analogs thereof have various biological activities.
  • the compounds have chemosensitizing activity, anti-microbial, anti-inflammation, radiosensitizing, and anti-cancer activity.
  • Studies have been conducted that show Salinosporamide A and its analogs have proteasome inhibitory activity, effect NF- ⁇ B / IKB signaling pathway, and have anti-anthrax activity.
  • Salinosporamide A and several analogs, as well as biological activity of the same, are described in U.S.
  • the compound of formula (V) can be synthesized from readily available starting materials, as described herein.
  • the compound of formula (V) may be subsequently converted to Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof.
  • Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof may be synthesized according to Scheme A.
  • each stereogenic carbon can be of R or S configuration.
  • the specific compounds exemplified in this application can be depicted in a particular configuration, compounds having either the opposite stereochemistry at any given chiral center or mixtures thereof are also envisioned unless otherwise specified.
  • chiral centers are found in the derivatives of this invention, it is to be understood that the compounds encompasses all possible stereoisomers unless otherwise indicated.
  • substituted has its ordinary meaning, as found in numerous contemporary patents from the related art. See, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 6,509,331; 6,506,787; 6,500,825; 5,922,683; 5,886,210; 5,874,443; and 6,350,759; all of which are incorporated herein in their entireties by reference.
  • substituents include but are not limited to hydrogen, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, alkyl amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO 2 -H, -SO 2 -OH, - SO 2 -alkyl, -SO 2 -substituted alkyl, -SO 2 -aryl and -SO 2 -heteroaryl
  • any "R" group(s) such as, without limitation, R 5 R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R4, R 5 , Re, R 7 , R8, RA and RB represent substituents that can be attached to the indicated atom.
  • An R group may be substituted or unsubstituted. If two "R" groups are covalently bonded to the same atom or to adjacent atoms, then they may be "taken together” as defined herein to form a cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or heterocycle. For example, without limitation, if Ri 3 and R ⁇ of an NRi a Rib group are indicated to be "taken together," it means that they are covalently bonded to one another to form a ring:
  • alkyl means any unbranched or branched, substituted or unsubstituted, saturated hydrocarbon, with C1-C24 preferred, and Ci-C 6 hydrocarbons being preferred, with methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, and tert-butyl, and pentyl being most preferred.
  • alkenyl means any unbranched or branched, substituted or unsubstituted, unsaturated hydrocarbon containing one or more double bonds.
  • alkenyl groups include allyl, homo-allyl, vinyl, crotyl, butenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, heptenyl and octenyl.
  • alkynyl as used herein, means any unbranched or branched, substituted or unsubstituted, unsaturated hydrocarbon with one or more triple bonds
  • cycloalkyl refers to any non-aromatic, substituted or unsubstituted, hydrocarbon ring, preferably having five to twelve atoms comprising the ring.
  • cycloalkyl comprises fused ring systems such that the definition covers bicyclic and tricyclic structures.
  • cycloalkenyl refers to any non-aromatic, substituted or unsubstituted, hydrocarbon ring that includes a double bond, preferably having five to twelve atoms comprising the ring. Furthermore, in the present context, the term “cycloalkenyl” comprises fused ring systems such that the definition covers bicyclic and tricyclic structures.
  • cycloalkynyl refers to any non-aromatic, substituted or unsubstituted, hydrocarbon ring that includes a triple bond, preferably having five to twelve atoms comprising the ring. Furthermore, in the present context, the term “cycloalkynyl” comprises fused ring systems such that the definition covers bicyclic and tricyclic structures.
  • acyl refers to hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or aryl connected, as substituents, via a carbonyl group. Examples include formyl, acetyl, propanoyl, benzoyl, and acryl. An acyl may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • aryl is intended to mean a carbocyclic aromatic ring or ring system. Moreover, the term “aryl” includes fused ring systems wherein at least two aryl rings, or at least one aryl and at least one C 3 - 8 -cycloalkyl share at least one chemical bond. Some examples of "aryl” rings include optionally substituted phenyl, naphthalenyl, phenanthrenyl, anthracenyl, tetralinyl, fluorenyl, indenyl, and indanyl. An aryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • heteroaryl is intended to mean a heterocyclic aromatic group where one or more carbon atoms in an aromatic ring have been replaced with one or more heteroatoms selected from the group comprising nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorous, and oxygen.
  • heteroaryl comprises fused ring systems wherein at least one aryl ring and at least one heteroaryl ring, at least two heteroaryl rings, at least one heteroaryl ring and at least one heterocyclyl ring, or at least one heteroaryl ring and at least one C 3 .g-cycloalkyl ring share at least one chemical bond.
  • a heteroaryl can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • heterocycle and “heterocyclyl” are intended to mean three-, four-, five-, six-, seven-, and eight-membered rings wherein carbon atoms together with from 1 to 3 heteroatoms constitute said ring.
  • a heterocycle may optionally contain one or more unsaturated bonds situated in such a way, however, that an aromatic ⁇ - electron system does not arise.
  • the heteroatoms are independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen.
  • a heterocycle may further contain one or more carbonyl or thiocarbonyl functionalities, so as to make the definition include oxo-systems and thio- systems such as lactams, lactones, cyclic imides, cyclic thioimides, cyclic carbamates, and the like.
  • Heterocyclyl rings may optionally also be fused to at least other heterocyclyl ring, at least one C 3 -8-cycloalkyl ring, at least one C 3 .g-cycloalkenyl ring and/or at least one C3-8-cycloalkynyl ring such that the definition includes bicyclic and tricyclic structures.
  • heterocyclyl groups examples include, but are not limited to, benzimidazolidinone, tetrahydroquinoline, and methylenedioxybenzene ring structures.
  • heterocycles include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrothiopyran, 4H- pyran, tetrahydropyran, piperidine, 1,3-dioxin, 1,3-dioxane, 1,4-dioxin, 1,4-dioxane, piperazine, 1 ,3-oxathiane, 1,4-oxathiin, 1 ,4-oxathiane, tetrahydro-l,4-thiazine, 2H- 1,2- oxazine, maleimide, succinimide, barbituric acid, thiobarbituric acid, dioxopiperazine, hydantoin, dihydrouracil, morpholine, trioxane,
  • alkoxy refers to any unbranched, or branched, substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated ether, with Ci-Ce unbranched, saturated, unsubstituted ethers being preferred, with methoxy being preferred, and also with dimethyl, diethyl, methyl-isobutyl, and methyl-tert-butyl ethers also being preferred.
  • cycloalkoxy refers to any non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring comprising an oxygen heteroatom, preferably having five to twelve atoms comprising the ring.
  • a cycloalkoxy can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • alkoxy carbonyl refers to any linear, branched, cyclic, saturated, unsaturated, aliphatic or aromatic alkoxy attached to a carbonyl group.
  • the examples include methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, propyloxycarbonyl group, isopropyloxycarbonyl group, butoxycarbonyl group, sec-butoxycarbonyl group, tert-butoxycarbonyl group, cyclopentyloxycarbonyl group, cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, benzyloxycarbonyl group, allyloxycarbonyl group, phenyl oxycarbonyl group, pyridyloxycarbonyl group, and the like.
  • An alkoxy carbonyl may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • (cycloalkyl)alkyl is understood as a cycloalkyl group connected, as a substituent, via a lower alkylene.
  • the (cycloalkyl)alkyl group and lower alkylene of a (cycloalkyl)alkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • heterocyclealkyl and “(heterocyclyl)alkyl” are understood as a heterocycle group connected, as a substituent, via a lower alkylene.
  • the heterocycle group and the lower alkylene of a (heterocycle)alkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • arylalkyl is intended to mean an aryl group connected, as a substituent, via a lower alkylene, each as defined herein.
  • the aryl group and lower alkylene of an arylalky may be substituted or unsubstituted. Examples include benzyl, substituted benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenyIpropyl, and naphthylalkyl.
  • heteroarylalkyl is understood as heteroaryl groups connected, as substituents, via a lower alkylene, each as defined herein.
  • the heteroaryl and lower alkylene of a heteroarylalkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. Examples include 2-thienylmethyl, 3-thienylmethyl, furylmethyl, thienylethyl, pyrrolylalkyl, pyridylalkyl, isoxazolylalkyl, imidazolylalkyl, and their substituted as well as benzo-fused analogs.
  • halogen atom means any one of the radio- stable atoms of column 7 of the Periodic Table of the Elements, i.e., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine, with bromine and chlorine being preferred.
  • BOPCl bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphinic chloride t-BuOH :f ⁇ rt-butanol//erf-butyl alcohol t-BuOK :potassium tert-butoxide
  • organometallic moiety and “organometallic moieties” as used herein refer to any chemical compound that contains a metal-element bond(s) of a largely covalent character.
  • metal as used herein include those elements traditionally classified as metals (e.g., lithium, magnesium, zinc, and tin) and those elements classified as metalloids (e.g., boron).
  • protecting group moiety and “protecting group moieties” as used herein refer to any atom or group of atoms that is added to a molecule in order to prevent existing groups in the molecule from undergoing unwanted chemical reactions. Examples of protecting group moieties are described in T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3. Ed. John Wiley & Sons, 1999, and in J.F.W. McOmie, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry Plenum Press, 1973, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • the protecting group moiety may be chosen in such a way, that they are stable to the reaction conditions applied and readily removed at a convenient stage using methodology known from the art.
  • protecting groups include benzyl; substituted benzyl; alkylcarbonyls (e.g., t- butoxycarbonyl (BOC)); arylalkylcarbonyls (e.g., benzyloxycarbonyl, benzoyl); substituted methyl ether (e.g.
  • methoxymethyl ether substituted ethyl ether; a substituted benzyl ether; tetrahydropyranyl ether; silyl ethers (e.g., trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, or t-butyldiphenylsilyl); esters (e.g. benzoate ester); carbonates (e.g. methoxymethylcarbonate); sulfonates (e.g. tosylate, mesylate); acyclic ketal (e.g.
  • any "PG" group(s) such as, without limitation, PGi, PG 2 and PG 3 represent a protecting group moiety.
  • the terms “pure,” “purified,” “substantially purified,” and “isolated” as used herein refer to the compound of the embodiment being free of other, dissimilar compounds with which the compound, if found in its natural state, would be associated in its natural state.
  • the compound may comprise at least 0.5%, 1%, 5%, 10%, or 20%, and most preferably at least 50% or 75% of the mass, by weight, of a given sample.
  • the starting compounds of formulae (I) and (II) may be synthesized from readily available materials.
  • a compound of formula (I) can be synthesized from a serine ester salt, an aldehyde (e.g. t- butyl aldehyde) and a base (e.g., triethylamine) at elevated temperatures.
  • the serine ester salt can be a D-serine methylester salt which can form a compound of formula (I) with the stereochemistry shown in Scheme 1-2.
  • a compound of formula (I) can have the structure shown above wherein Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci -6 alkyl; and R 2 can be hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C i- 6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl.
  • Rj is hydrogen, one skilled in the art would recognize that the stereochemistry at C-4 may not be retained upon conversion of a compound of formula (IV) to a compound of formula (V) shown below.
  • a compound of formula (I) can have the following structure and stereochemistry:
  • a compound of formula (II) can be synthesized according to Schemes 2, 3 and 4.
  • the ester precursor of the compound of Formula II can be prepared according to Scheme 2, starting with a ⁇ -ketoester and a base (e.g., t-BuOK or NaH) and then adding an allyl halide.
  • the ester precursor of the compound of formula (II) can have the structure shown above wherein R can be hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci -6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; and R 3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci -6 alkyl, C 3 . 6 cycloalkyl, C 2-O alkenyl, C 3 - 6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl.
  • An exemplary ester precursor is the compound having the following structure:
  • the protected ester precursor of the compound of formula (II) can be prepared according to Scheme 3.
  • the ketone carbonyl of the ester precursor can be protected using a suitable protecting group moiety/moieties, as described herein.
  • One method for protecting the ketone carbonyl is shown in Scheme 3.
  • the protected ester precursor of the compound of formula (II) can have structure shown in Scheme 3 wherein R can be hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci -6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; R 3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cue alkyl, C 3-6 cycloalkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl; each Y can be an oxygen or sulfur; and R ⁇ and RB can be each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci -6 alkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl and C 2-6 alkynyl, wherein R A and R B can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl.
  • the ketone carbonyl may be protected by reacting the ester precursor with 1,2 dihydroxyethane to form a 1,3-dioxolane heterocyclic ring as shown below:
  • a compound of formula (II) can have the structure shown in Scheme 4 wherein R 3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C 3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C 3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl; each Y can be an oxygen or sulfur; and RA and RB can be each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj -6 alkyl, C 2 -6 alkenyl and C 2- e alkynyl, wherein R A and R B can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl.
  • the compound of formula (II) can have the following structure:
  • a compound of formula (III) can be formed by reacting a compound of formula (I) with a compound of formula (II) under suitable conditions wherein Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci- 6 alkyl; R 2 can be hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci- 6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C 1 . 6 alkyl, C 3 .
  • a compound of formula (I) can be added to a mixture containing a compound of formula (II), a mild base (e.g., triethylamine or N-methyl piperidine) and an acylating agent such as methanesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethanesulfonyl chloride or chloromethylformate.
  • a mild base e.g., triethylamine or N-methyl piperidine
  • an acylating agent such as methanesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethanesulfonyl chloride or chloromethylformate.
  • the compounds of formulae (I), (II) and (III) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • the compounds of formulae (I) 5 (II) and (III) can have the following structures: ,
  • Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci-g alkyl
  • R 2 can be hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj .
  • R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci -6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl; each Y can be an oxygen or sulfur; and R A and R B can be each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci ⁇ alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein R A and R B can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl.
  • One method for removing the ketone carbonyl protecting group includes reacting a compound of formula (III) with sodium iodide and a Lewis base such as cerium (III) chloride heptahydrate.
  • a second method includes reacting a compound of formula (III) with iodine in acetone at an elevated temperature.
  • a compound of formula (III) can be reacted with lithium tetrafluoroboride at an elevated temperature to form a compound of formula (IV).
  • the ketone carbonyl protecting group can be removed using various hydrolytic, oxidative and/or solid-state methods such as those described and cited in Habibi et al., Molecules, (2003) 8, 663-9, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • step (c) of Scheme 5 treatment of a compound of formula (IV) with an appropriate base (e.g., t-BuOK, NaOMe, NaOEt or LDA) can induce an intramolecular aldol reaction to form a compound of formula (V) wherein Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted lkyl; R 2 can be hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; and R 3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Q- ⁇ alkyl, C 3-6 cycloalkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl, C 3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl.
  • the compounds of formulae (IV) and (V) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • compounds of formula (V) may adopt one of the following stereochemical structures:
  • a compound of formula (V) may adopt one of the following stereochemical structures:
  • V-IA V-IB
  • V-IC V-IC
  • a compound of formula (V) can be used to synthesize heterocyclic compounds such as Salinosporamide A and analogs thereof.
  • One method can proceed through a compound of formula (X), which can then be transformed to Salinosporamide A and analogs thereof, as shown in the schemes herein.
  • a compound of formula (X) can be produced from a compound of formula (V) as shown in Scheme 6.
  • step (d) of Scheme 6 the carbon-carbon double bond of the compound of formula (V) can be oxidatively cleaved and then cyclized to form a hemiacetal with the tertiary hydroxy group to form a compound of formula (VI), wherein Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci- ⁇ alkyl; R.
  • R 3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci -6 alkyl, C 3-6 cycloalkyl, C 2- 6 alkenyl, C 3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl.
  • An exemplary method for preparing a compound of formula (VI) includes reacting a compound of formula (V) with a suitable oxidant or oxidant combination, such as OSO4 and NMO for several hours and then adding an additional oxidant (e.g.,NaIO4 or Pb(OAc) 4 ) to the reaction mixture. The reaction can be quenched using suitable salt solutions.
  • the hemiacetal of a compound of formula (VI) can be protected by forming an acetal using a protecting group moiety (e.g. benzyl, substituted benzyl, silyl, or methoxyl methyl) to form a compound of formula (VII), as shown in step (e) of Scheme 6.
  • a protecting group moiety e.g. benzyl, substituted benzyl, silyl, or methoxyl methyl
  • Rj, R2, and R3 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VI); and PGi can be a protecting group moiety. Examples of suitable protecting group moieties are described herein.
  • the compounds of formulae (VI) and (VII) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • the COOR 2 group of a compound of formula (VII) can be reduced to an alcohol to form a compound of formula (VIII), wherein Rj, R 3 , and PGi can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII).
  • the COOR 2 group can be reduced to an alcohol using a suitable reducing reagent (e.g., diisobutylaluminum hydride, lithium borohydride, lithium aluminum hydride, superhydride) and known techniques.
  • compounds of formulae (VII) and (VIII) can have the following structures:
  • step (g) of Scheme 6 the C-5 alcohol of the compound of formula (VIII) can be oxidized using an appropriate oxidizing agent to form the compound of formula (IX), wherein Ri, R 3 , and PGi can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII).
  • an alcohol can be oxidized to an aldehyde using an oxidant such as Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP/NMO, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC.
  • the COOR 2 group of a compound of formula (VII) can be reduced directly to an aldehyde to give a compound of formula (IX) in a single step.
  • a compound of formula (X) can be synthesized by reacting an organ ⁇ metallic moiety containing at least one R 4 with a compound of formula (IX), wherein Ri, R 3 , and PGi can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII); and R 4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -Cj 2 alkenyl, C 2 -C] 2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C 3 -C 12 cycloalkenyl, C 3 -Ci 2 cycloalkynyl, C 3 - C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroary
  • R 4 can be selected from the group consisting of: substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C 3 -Ci 2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulf ⁇ nylalkyl, alk
  • organometallic moieties include organomagnesium compounds, organolithium compounds, organotin compounds, organocuprates compounds, organozinc, and organopalladium compounds, metal carbonyls, metallocenes, carbine complexes, and organometalloids (e.g., organoboranes and organosi lanes).
  • the organometallic moiety can be selected from the group consisting Of R 4 -MgR 7 , R 4 -ZnR 7 , R 4 -Li, (R 4 ) P -B(R 7 ) S - P , and (R-O q -Sn(R 7 ),,.
  • R 7 can selected from the group consisting of halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, isopinocampheyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, and carbonylalkoxy, wherein if more than one R 7 is present, the R 7 groups can optionally be bond together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl (e.g., 9-BBN), optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, optionally substituted heteroalkyl or optionally substituted heteroalkenyl ring; p can be an integer from 1 to 3; and q can be an integer from 1 to 4.
  • the organometallic moiety is (R4)p-B(R 7 ) 3-P .
  • the organometallic moiety is (R 4 ) P -B(R 7 )S- P , wherein R 4 is 2-cyclohexenyl.
  • the organometallic moiety is (R ⁇ ,)p- B(R 7 ) 3-P , wherein R 4 is 2-cyclohexenyl, p is 1 , and the two R 7 groups are taken together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl.
  • the organometallic moiety is R 4 -MgR 7 .
  • the organometallic moiety is R 4 -MgR 7 , wherein R 4 is 2-cyclohexenyl. In some embodiments, the organometallic moiety is R 4 - MgR 7 , wherein R 4 is 2-cyclohexenyl and R 7 is a halogen (e.g., chlorine).
  • the compounds of formulae (IX) and (X) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • the compounds of formulae (IX) and (X) may have the following structures and stereochemistry.
  • step (i) of Scheme 7-1 the C-5 secondary hydroxy group of a compound of formula (X) can be protected with a suitable protecting group moiety to form a compound of formula (Xp), wherein R
  • suitable protecting group moieties that can be used to protect the C-5 secondary hydroxy group of a compound of formula (X) include a substituted methyl ether (e.g.
  • a substituted ethyl a substituted benzylethyl, tetrahydropyranyl, a silyl ether (e.g. trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, or t-butyldiphenylsilyl), an ester (e.g. benzoate ester), or a carbonate (e.g. methoxymethyl carbonate).
  • the C-5 secondary hydroxy group of a compound of formula (X) can remain unprotected, as shown in Scheme 7-2.
  • compounds of formulae (X) and (Xp) can have the following structures:
  • a compound of formula (Xp) can be cleaved using a suitable acid (e.g. triflic acid, HCl, PTSA, PPTS, TFA, camphor sulfonic acid) to form a compound of formula (XIp), as shown in Scheme 7-1.
  • a suitable acid e.g. triflic acid, HCl, PTSA, PPTS, TFA, camphor sulfonic acid
  • a suitable acid e.g. triflic acid, HCl, PTSA, PPTS, TFA, camphor sulfonic acid
  • the compounds of formulae (X), (Xp) 5 (XI), and (XIp) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • compounds of formulae (X), (Xp), (XI) and (XIp) can have the following structures:
  • step (k) the C-15 primary alcohol group of a compound of formula (XIp) can be transformed to R 5 to form a compound of formula (XIIp).
  • step (k) the C-15 primary alcohol group of a compound of formula (XIp) can be transformed to R 5 to form a compound of formula (XIIp).
  • step (k) the C-15 primary alcohol group of a compound of formula (XIp) can be transformed to R 5 to form a compound of formula (XII).
  • step (k) the C-15 primary alcohol group of a compound of formula (XIp) can be transformed to R 5 to form a compound of formula (XIIp).
  • the primary alcohol group can be converted to a carboxylic acid using appropriate oxidation conditions such as Jones oxidation.
  • the carboxylic acid group can be prepared from the primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XI) or (XIp) through an aldehyde.
  • the primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XI) or (XIp) can first be converted to aldehyde using appropriate oxidant such as Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC and then the resulting aldehyde can be oxidized further to carboxylic acid using appropriate oxidants such as a combination of sodium chlorite/sodium phosphate dibasic/2-methyl-2-butene.
  • the carboxylic acid can then be further converted to an ester, a thioester, acid halides (e.g., acid chloride) or an anhydride using an appropriate alcohol, thiol (e.g., thiophenol, cystine), thionyl or oxalyl chlorides, carboxylic acid (e.g., acetic acid, benzoic acid), and/or anhydride (e.g., acetic anhydride).
  • the compounds of formulae (XI), (XIp), (XII) and (XIIp) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • a compound of formula (XIV) can be synthesized by removing any protecting group moieties on the compound of formula (XII) and/or (XIIp) to form a compound of formula (XIII) and then cleaving the hemiacetal of the compound of formula (XIII).
  • R 3 , R 4 , and Rs of the compounds of formulae (XIII) and (XIV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XIIp).
  • One method for reductively cleaving the hemiacetal can be using a suitable reducing reagent such as sodium borohydride.
  • the formation of a compound of formula (XIV) from a compound of formula (XII) or (XIIp) can be accomplished in a single step.
  • the protecting group moiety PGj on the compound of formula (XII) can be initially removed to form a compound of formula (XIII) and then the resulting hemiacetal can be reductively cleaved to form a compound of formula (XIV).
  • the protecting group moieties PG] and PG 2 on the compound of formula (XIIp) can be removed simultaneously or sequentially to form a compound of formula (XIII) and then the resulting hemiacetal can be reductively cleaved to form a compound of formula (XIV). If the protecting group moieties on the compound of formula (XIIp) are removed sequentially, they can be removed in any order to form a compound of formula (XIII).
  • Compounds of formulae (XII), (XIIp), (XIII), and (XIV) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • a compound of formula (XV) can be formed by treating a compound of formula (XIV) with an appropriate base (e.g., BOPCl/pyridine, tri ethyl amine) to induce a lactonization reaction and form the 4- membered heterocyclic ring, wherein R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 can be same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XII) or (XIIp).
  • an appropriate base e.g., BOPCl/pyridine, tri ethyl amine
  • R$ is an ester
  • it can first be transformed to a carboxylic acid, an activated acid (e.g., acid halide), or an activated ester (e.g., p-nitrophenyl ester, pentafluorophenyl ester, pentafluoroethyl ester, trifluoroethyl ester, trichloroethyl ester, a thioester, etc.) before being treated with an appropriate reagent to induce the lactonization reaction.
  • R 5 is carboxylic acid
  • it can be treated with an appropriate base to affect the lactonization reaction.
  • Rs is an amide
  • it can first be transformed to a carboxylic acid, an activated acid, or an activated ester such as those described herein before being treated with an appropriate base to induce the lactonization reaction.
  • the compounds of formulae (XIV) and (XV) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • the compounds of formulae (XIV) and (XV) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • R 5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IA) can be a carboxylic acid.
  • R 5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IA) can be an activated acid (e.g., acid chloride).
  • R 5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IA) can be an activated ester such as p-nitrophenyl ester, pentafluorophenyl ester, pentafluoroethyl ester, trifluoroethyl ester, trichloroethyl ester, thioester, etc.
  • R 5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IB) can be a carboxylic acid.
  • R 5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IB) can be an activated acid (e.g., acid chloride).
  • R 5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IB) can be an activated ester such as p-nitrophenyl ester, pentafluorophenyl ester, pentafluoroethyl ester, trifluoroethyl ester, trichloroethyl ester, thioester, etc.
  • the lactonization reaction includes the further proviso that R 6 cannot be methyl or t-butyl when the compounds of formulae (XIV) and (XV) have the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XIV-IA) and (XV-IA).
  • a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R 3 is methyl then R 4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl.
  • a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if R3 is methyl then R 4 cannot be isopropyl, cyclohexyl, or phenyl.
  • a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R 3 is methyl then R 4 cannot be isopropyl.
  • a compound of formula (XV) can also be synthesized from a compound of formula (X) as shown in Scheme 7-3.
  • a compound of formula (XV) can also be obtained from a compound of formula (X) as shown in Schemes 7-4 and 7-5.
  • Scheme 7-3
  • a compound of formula (XXIII) can be synthesized by removing the protecting group moiety on the compound of formula (X) and reductively opening the hemiacetal.
  • the protecting group moiety can be removed using known methods and the hemiacetal can be reductively opened using a reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride).
  • a reducing agent e.g., sodium borohydride.
  • the substituents (and protecting group moiety where applicable) (Ri, R 3 , R 4 , and PGi) for compound of formulae (X) and (XXIII) can be selected from the following:
  • Ri can be hydrogen or an unsubstituted or substituted Ci.
  • R 3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci- 6 alkyl, C 3-6 cycloalkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl;
  • R 4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C )2 alkenyl, C 2 -Ci 2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C 3 -Cj 2 cycloalkenyl, C 3 -Cj 2 cycloalkynyl, C 3 -Ci 2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl,
  • (heterocyclyl)alkyl acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylth ⁇ oalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a
  • the C- 13 primary and C-5 secondary hydroxy groups of a compound of formula (XXIII) can be protected using suitable protecting group moieties as described herein to form a compound of formula (XXIVp), as shown in Scheme 7-3.
  • a compound of formula (XXIVp) can be protected to form a compound of formula (XXIV), as shown in Scheme 7-4 and 7- 5.
  • Ri, R 3 , and R 4 of the compound of formula (XXIV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X) and PG 3 can be a protecting group moiety.
  • PG 3 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyls (e.g., benzoyl); substituted or unsubstituted alkyl carbonyl (e.g. acetyl); substituted methyl ether (e.g. methoxymethyl); substituted ethyl ether; substituted or substituted benzyl ether (e.g.
  • , R 3 and R 4 of the compound of formula (XXIVp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X), and PG 2 and PG 3 can be protecting group moieties.
  • the compounds of formulae (XXIII), (XXIV), and (XXIVp) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • the aminal of a compound of formula (XXIV) can be cleaved using a suitable acid as described herein to form a compound of formula (XXV).
  • the aminal of a compound of formula (XXIVp) can also be cleaved using a suitable acid to form a compound of formula (XXVp).
  • R 3 , and R 4 of the compound of formula (XXV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X), and PG 3 can be a protecting group moiety.
  • R3 and R 4 , and PG 2 for compound of formula (XXVp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X), and PG 2 and PG 3 can be protecting group moieties.
  • Compounds of formulae (XXIV), (XXIVp), (XXV), and (XXVp) may also have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • (XXV) can then be protected with an appropriate protecting group moiety to form a compound of formula (XXVp).
  • R 3 , R 4 , PG 2 , and PG 3 of the compounds of formulae (XXV) and (XXVp) can be the same as described in the preceding paragraphs.
  • the compounds of formulae (XXV) and (XXVp) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • the primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XXV) and/or (XXVp) can be transformed to R 5 to form a compound of formula (XXVI) and/or (XXVIp), respectively (see Schemes 7-3 and 7-4, respectively).
  • the compound of formula (XXVp) can be transformed directly to a compound of formula (XXVI) as shown in Scheme 7-5.
  • the protecting group moiety, PG 2 , on the compound of formula (XXVp) can be removed simultaneously with the transformation of the C- 15 primary alcohol to R 5 group to form a compound of formula (XXVI).
  • PG 2 can be removed before or after the transformation of the primary alcohol.
  • R 3 , R 4 , and Rs of the compounds of formulae (XXVI) and (XXVIp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formulae (XII) or (XIIp) of Schemes 7-1 and/or 7-2, and PG 2 and PG3 can be a protecting group moieties.
  • Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXV), (XXVp), (XXVI), and (XXVIp) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • the protecting group PG 3 on compounds of formulae (XXVI) and (XXVIp) can be removed to form a compound of formulae (XXVII) and (XXVIIp), respectively. See Scheme 7-5.
  • the C- 13 primary hydroxy of the compounds of formulae (XXVII) and (XXVIIp) can then be reprotected with the same or different protecting group.
  • a benzoyl group protecting the C- 13 hydroxy on a compound of formula (XXVI) or (XXVIp) can be removed and replaced with a TBS or TES protecting group. Suitable methods for removing protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art.
  • a compound of formula (XXVIII) and/or (XXVIIIp) can be synthesized via a lactonization reaction from a compound of formula (XXVI) and (XXVIp), respectively. See Schemes 7-3, 7-4 and 7-5.
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 (and PG 2 . where relevant) for compounds of formulae (XXVIII) and (XXVIIIp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formulae (XXVI) and (XXVIp) 5 and PG3 can be a protecting group moiety.
  • R 5 of the compound of formula (XXVI) or (XXVIp) can be a carboxylic acid.
  • R 5 of the compound of formula (XXVI) or (XXVIp) can be an activated acid (e.g., acid chloride).
  • R5 of the compound of formula (XXVI) or (XXVIp) can be an activated ester such as p-nitrophenyl ester, pentafluorophenyl ester, pentafluoroethyl ester, trifluoroethyl ester, trichloroethyl ester, thioester, etc.
  • the lactonization reaction includes the further the proviso that R 5 cannot be methyl or t-butyl when the compounds of formulae (XXVIII) and (XXVI) have the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXVIII-IA) and (XXVI-IA).
  • any protecting group moieties can be removed from a compound of formula (XXVIII) and/or (XXVIIIp) to form a compound of formula (XV), respectively.
  • R 3 and R 4 (and PG 2 , where relevant) of the compounds (XXVIII), (XXVIIIp) and (XV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formulae (XXVI) or (XXVIp), and PG 3 can be a protecting group moiety.
  • the protecting groups PG 2 and PG 3 can be removed from a compound of formula (XXVIIIp) in a stepwise fashion to form a compound of formula (XV); the protecting groups can be removed in any order.
  • the protecting groups PG 2 and PG 3 are simultaneously removed from a compound of formula (XXVIIIp) to form a compound of formula (XV).
  • a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R 3 is methyl then R 4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl.
  • Compounds of formulae (XXVIII), (XXVIIIp) and (XV) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • a compound of formula (XV) can also be synthesized via a lactonization reaction from a compound of formula (XXVII), as shown in Scheme 7-5, or lactonization reaction from a compound of formula (XXVIIp) followed by deprotection.
  • R 3 , ILt, R5, (and PG 2 , where relevant) for the compounds of formulae (XXVII), (XXVIIp), and (XV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formulae XVII or (XVIIp).
  • compounds of formulae (XXVII), (XXVIIp), (XVp) and (XV) can have the structures and stereochemistry shown below:
  • the lactonization reaction includes the further proviso that Rg cannot be methyl or t-butyl when the compounds of formulae (XXVII) and (XV) have the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXVII -IA) and (XV-IA).
  • a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R 3 is methyl then R 4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl.
  • a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R 3 is methyl then R 4 cannot be isopropyl.
  • a compound of formula (XVp) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if R 3 is methyl and R 4 is isopropyl then PG 2 cannot be DMIPS or TB S.
  • a compound of formula (XVp) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XVp) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XVp-A) and R 3 is methyl and R 4 is isopropyl then PG 2 cannot be DMIPS or TBS.
  • a compound of formula (XV) can further be transformed by replacing the C- 13 primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV) to form a compound of formula (XVI), wherein R 3 and R 4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X) and X can be a halogen (e.g., F, Cl, Br, and I). If desired or necessary, R 4 , in some embodiments, can be protected and/or deprotected one or several times in any of the synthetic steps described herein.
  • R 3 and R 4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X) and X can be a halogen (e.g., F, Cl, Br, and I).
  • Salinosporamide A can be synthesized by chlorinating a compound of formula (XV), wherein R 4 is 2-cyclohexenyl and R 3 is methyl.
  • a compound of formula (XVI) can be prepared by substituting the C- 13 primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV), with the proviso that the compounds of formula (XV) and (XVI) cannot be the compounds of formula (XV-IA) and (XVI-IA).
  • R4 if the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XVI-A), then R4 cannot be isopropyl or 2-cyclohexenyl when R 3 is methyl and X is chlorine.
  • the C- 13 primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV) can be converted to a leaving group, as shown in Scheme 7-7.
  • suitable leaving groups (LG) includes sulfonate leaving groups (e.g. tosylate, (OTs), mesylate (OMs), triflate (OTf), tripsylate (OTps), and mesitylate (OMst)).
  • R3 and R 4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X).
  • the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be protected or oxidized before converting the C-13 secondary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV). After the leaving group has been added, the C-5 center can be deprotected and/or reduced to a hydroxy group.
  • Suitable nucleophiles include but are not limited to R 9 S “ , CN “ , Rc)O " , halide anion, NRg 3 R ⁇ “ , N 3 " , - CO 2 Rg, R9OH, and R9SH wherein R 9> R 9a and R 9b can each be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-Ci 2 alkyl, C 2 -C n alkenyl, C 2 -Ci 2 alkynyl, C 3 -Ci 2 cycloalkyl, C 3 -Ci 2 cycloalkenyl, C37C12 cycloalkynyl, C 3 -Ci 2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, and alkyl acyl, where
  • the C- 13 primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV) can be oxidized.
  • the C- 13 primary hydroxy group can be oxidized to an aldehyde to form a compound of formula (XXX).
  • R 3 and R 4 of a compound of formula (XXX) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVII).
  • the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be protected or remained unprotected during the oxidation.
  • a compound of formula (XXX) can further be transformed as shown in step (n) of Scheme 7-10.
  • n can be O. In another embodiment, n can be 1. In still another embodiment, n can be 2. In yet still another embodiment, n can be 3. In an embodiment, n can be 4. [0240] Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXX), and (XXXI) are shown below:
  • a compound of formula (XXXIII) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXXI).
  • a compound of formula (XXXIII) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if R 3 is methyl and R' is hydrogen or chlorine then R 4 cannot be isopropyl, cyclohexyl, or phenyl.
  • compounds of formulae (XXXI) and (XXXIII) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • nonselective reduction of the compound of formula (XXXl-A) or (XXXl-B) can be used to obtain the compounds of formulae (XXXII), respectively.
  • a compound of formula (XXXII) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that R' cannot be hydrogen or chlorine.
  • a compound of formula (XXX) can also be used to form a compound of formula (XXXIV) using an organometallic reagent as shown in step (p) of Scheme 7- 10.
  • organometallic reagents include but are not limited to organolithium compounds, organotin compounds, organocuprates compounds, organozinc, and organopalladium compounds, metal carbonyls, metallocenes, carbine complexes, and organometalloids (e.g., organoboranes and organosilanes).
  • the organometallic moiety can be selected from the group consisting of Rg-MgR 7 , Rg-ZnR 7 , Rg-Li, (R8)p-B(R 7 ) 3- p, and (R8) q -Sn(R 7 )4 -q ; wherein R 7 can selected from the group consisting of halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, isopinocampheyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, and carbonylalkoxy, wherein if more than one R 7 is present, the R 7 groups can optionally be bond together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl (e.g., 9-BBN), optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, optionally substituted heteroalkyl or optionally substituted heteroalkenyl ring; p can be an integer from 1 to 3; and
  • the organometallic moiety is (R8) P -B(R 7 ) 3-P .
  • the organometallic moiety is (Rg) p -B(R 7 ) 3 - P , wherein Rg is -(CH 2 ) a OH.
  • the organometallic moiety is (Rg)p-B(R 7 ) 3-P , wherein Rg is — (CH 2 ) a OH, p is 1, and the two R 7 groups are taken together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl.
  • the organometallic moiety is Rg-MgR 7 .
  • the organometallic moiety is Rg-MgR 7 , wherein Rg is -(CH2) a OH. In some embodiments, the organometallic moiety is Rg-MgR 7 , wherein Rg is -(CHs) 3 OH and R 7 is a halogen (e.g., chlorine).
  • R 3 and R4 of a compound of formula (XXXIV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXVI).
  • a can be 1.
  • R 8 can be -(CH 2 ) a OH, wherein a can be selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 7. Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXXIV-IB) when Rs is -(CH 2 ) a OH is shown below:
  • a compound of formula (XXXIV) can be halogenated to form a compound of formula (XXXV), wherein X is a halogen (e.g., F 3 Cl, Br, and I), as shown in Scheme 7-11.
  • R 3 and R 4 of a compound of formula (XXXV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXVI).
  • a can be 1.
  • a can be 2.
  • the stereochemistry of the secondary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be inverted (e.g., by a Mitsunobu transformation) to form a compound of formula (XVI-A).
  • Salinosporamide A can be synthesized from a compound with the structure and stereochemistry of formula (XVI-IB) as shown below:
  • the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted via a multistep process, for example, by oxidizing the secondary hydroxy to a ketone and then reducing the ketone to a secondary hydroxy of opposite stereochemistry.
  • the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be oxidized with a suitable oxidizing agent (e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP/NMO, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC 5 or PDC) to form the compound of formula (XXII).
  • a suitable oxidizing agent e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP/NMO, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC 5 or PDC
  • R 4 cannot be substituted or unsubstituted cyclohexenyl, unsubstituted cyclohexa-l,3-dienyl, TMSO substituted cyclohexa-l,3-dienyl, unsubstituted phenyl, TMSO substituted phenyl, when R 3 is methyl and X is halogen.
  • the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XXII-A), then R 4 cannot be substituted or unsubstituted cyclohexenyl, unsubstituted cyclohexa-l,3-dienyl, TMSO substituted cyclohexa-1,3- dienyl, unsubstituted phenyl, TMSO substituted phenyl, when R 3 is methyl and X is halogen.
  • the compound of formula (XXII) can then be reduced to a compound of formula (XVI-A) using a suitable chemical reagent such as sodium borohydride. In some embodiments, the reduction can be accomplished via selective enzymatic transformation.
  • the reducing enzyme is a ketoreductase such as KRED-EXP- ClA and/or KRED-EXP-BIY.
  • Salinosporamide A can be synthesized from a compound with the structure and stereochemistry of formula (XVI-IB) as follows:
  • the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted at any time after the addition of the R 4 group to the compound of formula (X).
  • the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted in the compounds of formulae (X), (Xp), (XI) 3 (XIp), (XII), (XIIp) 5 (XIII), (XIV) 5 (XV), (XXIII), (XXIV) 5 (XXIVp), (XXV), (XXVp), (XXVI), (XXVIp), (XXII), (XXVIII), and (XXVIIIp).
  • the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted in a one step process as described herein (e.g., by a Mitsunobu transformation). The inversion can also take place in multistep process.
  • the C-5 secondary hydroxy group can be oxidized using an appropriate oxidizing agent (e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP/NMO, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC) to a keto group and then reduced to a hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent such as sodium borohydride.
  • the keto group can be reduced via selective enzymatic transformation.
  • the reducing enzyme is a ketoreductase such as KRED-EXP-ClA and/or KRED-EXP-BlY.
  • Scheme 8-1 shows a method of synthesizing a compound of formula (XVII) from a compound of formula (V).
  • Scheme 8-2 shows a method of synthesizing a compound of formula (XVII) from a compound of formula (X).
  • Schemes 9-1 and 9-2 show methods of synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs from a compound of formula (XVII).
  • steps (d) and (e) of Scheme 8-1 can be the same as described above with respect to Scheme 6.
  • R 4 can be added to a compound of formula (VII) using an organometallic moiety containing at least one R 4 to form a compound of formula (XVII), wherein Rj can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci -6 alkyl; R 2 can be a hydrogen substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj -6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; R 3 can be a substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C 1 .
  • R 4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-Ci 2 alkyl, C 2 -Ci 2 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C 3 -Ci 2 cycloalkenyl, C 3 -C12 cycloalkynyl, C 3 -C1 2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl
  • R 4 can be selected from the group consisting of: substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C 3 -C] 2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxy
  • a compound of formula (XVII) can also be synthesized from a compound of formula (X) by oxidizing the secondary alcohol group of the compound of formula (X) 5 according to Scheme 8-2.
  • the compound of formula (X) can be synthesized as described in Scheme 6.
  • a compound of formula (VII) can be synthesized from a compound of formula (V) via steps (d) and (e) of Scheme 8-3 that are described above with respect to Scheme 6.
  • the ester of the compound of formula (VII) can be transformed to a carboxylic acid using methods known to those skilled in the art (e.g., hydrolysis by LiOH, alkaline thioates such as LiSMe, NaSMe, LiSCaHs 1 etc.) which can be further transformed to acid halide using a suitable reagent (e.g. Oxalyl chloride, SOCl 2 etc.) to form a compound of formula (XXXVI).
  • Ri, R 3 and PGi of the compound of formula (XXXVI) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII) and X is a halogen.
  • R 4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C 1 -Ci 2 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -Ci 2 alkynyl, C 3 -Cj 2 cycloalkyl, C 3 -Ci 2 cycloalkenyl, C 3 -Ci 2 cycloalkynyl, C 3 -C 12 heterocycly], aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkylalkyl
  • R 4 can be selected from the group consisting of: substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C 3 -Ci 2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl.
  • arylthioalkyl carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulf ⁇ nylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkyl ⁇ hosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyri
  • compounds of formulae (XXXVII) and (XVII) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • step (g 2 ) of Scheme 9-1 the aminal of a compound of formula (XVII) can be cleaved to form a compound of formula (XVIII) using an acid reagent (e.g., triflic acid or HCl).
  • an acid reagent e.g., triflic acid or HCl
  • Rj, R 3 , R 4 and PGi of a compound of formula (XVIII) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVII).
  • the compounds of formula (XVII) and (XVIII) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • the carboxylic acid group can be prepared from the primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XVIII) through an aldehyde.
  • the primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XVIII) can first be converted to aldehyde using appropriate oxidant such as Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC and then the resulting aldehyde can be oxidized further to carboxylic acid using appropriate oxidants such as a combination of sodium chlorite/sodium phosphate dibasic/2-methyl-2-butene. If desired the carboxylic acid can then be converted to an ester, a thioester, or an anhydride to form a compound of formula (XIX) using an appropriate alcohol, thiol (e.g. thiophenol, cystine), carboxylic acid (e.g.
  • appropriate oxidant such as Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC
  • carboxylic acid can then be converted to an ester, a thioester, or an anhydride to form
  • R 3 and R 4 of a compound of formula (XIX) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVIII).
  • a compound of formula (XX) can be synthesized by removing the protecting group moiety on the compound of formula (XIX) and reductively opening the resulting hemiacetal.
  • the hemiacetal can be reductively opened using a reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride).
  • a reducing agent e.g., sodium borohydride
  • R 3 , R4, and R5 of a compound of formula (XX) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XIX).
  • Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formula (XIX) and (XX) can be as follows:
  • compounds of formula (XIX) and (XX) can have the following structures:
  • a compound of formula (XXI) can be synthesized from a compound of formula (XX) via a lactonization reaction, as shown in step (J 2 ) of Scheme 9-1.
  • R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 of a compound of formula (XXI) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XX).
  • compounds of formula (XX) and (XXI) can have the following structures:
  • a compound of formula (XXI) can further be transformed by substituting the primary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XXI) to form a compound of formula (XXII).
  • R 3 and R 4 of a compound of formula (XXII) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXI), and X can be a halogen.
  • Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formula (XXI) and (XXII) are shown below:
  • compounds of formula (XXI) and (XXII) can have the following structures:
  • step (I 2 ) of Scheme 9-1 the C-5 ketone group attached to the carbon adjacent to R 4 of a compound of formula (XXII) can be reduced to a secondary hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) or an enzyme to form a compound of formula (XVI).
  • a suitable reducing agent e.g., sodium borohydride
  • the compound of formula (XXII) can be reduced to the compound of formula (XVI-A) and/or (XVI-B).
  • Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formula (XXII) and (XVI) are shown below:
  • the stereochemistry of the secondary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be inverted in a single step or a multistep process, as described herein.
  • a compound of formula (XXI) can also be used to synthesize a compound of formula (XV), as shown in Scheme 9-1.
  • the C-5 keto group of the compound of formula (XXI) can be reduced using an appropriate reducing agent such as those described herein to form a compound of formula (XV).
  • the C- 13 primary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XV) can be used to obtain Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof following Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10 and 7-11 described herein.
  • the stereochemistry of the secondary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be inverted in a single step or a multistep process, such as those described.
  • the compounds of formulae (XXI), (XV), and (XVI) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • compounds of formula (XV) can be synthesized via Scheme 9-2.
  • a compound of formula (XXI) can be synthesized from a compound of formula (XVII) via steps (g 2 ), (b.2), (i 2 ) and f ⁇ ) of Scheme 9-2 that are described above with respect to Scheme 9-1.
  • the C-5 keto group of the compound of formula (XXI) can be reduced to a secondary hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) or an enzyme to form a heterocyclic compound of formula (XV), for example, compounds (XV-A) and/or (XV-B), wherein R 3 , R 4 , and X can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXII).
  • the ketone group of a compound of formula (XVIl) can be protected using a suitable protecting group moiety/moieties to form a compound of formula (XVIIp).
  • Ri, R 3 , R 4 , and PG] can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVII) 5 each Y can be an oxygen or sulfur, and R A and RB can be each independently selected from the group consisting of Cu alky I, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein R A and R B can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl.
  • a compound of formula (XVIIp) can be transformed to a compound of formula (XXIIp) following the methods as described with respect to steps (g 2 ), (h 2 ), fa), (J2), and (k 2 ) of Scheme 9-1.
  • the protecting group moiety/moieties, Y-R A and Y-R B can be removed from a compound of formula (XXIIp) using a suitable method to obtain a compound of formula (XXII).
  • the substituents of the ketone protected compounds can be selected from the same groups as those described with respect to the corresponding unprotected compounds.
  • R 3 , R4, PGi and R 5 of a compound of formula (XIXp) can be selected from the same groups as a compound of formula (XIX).
  • the compounds of formula (XVIIp), (XVIIIp), (XIXp), (XXp), (XXIp) and (XXIIp) can have the same structures and/or stereochemistry as the corresponding non-protected compounds of Scheme 9-1 except that the keto carbonyl group is protected with a suitable protecting group(s).
  • ketone group attached to the carbon adjacent to R4 of a compound of formula (XXII) can be reduced to a hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) or an enzyme to form a compound of formula (XVI), including (XVI-A) and/or (XVI-B), wherein R 3 , R 4 , and X can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXII).
  • a suitable reducing agent e.g., sodium borohydride
  • a compound of formula (XXIp) can be synthesized from a compound of formula (XVII) via steps (g 2 ), (h 2 ), f ⁇ ) and (J2) of Scheme 9-4 that are described above with respect to Scheme 9-1.
  • the protecting group moiety/moieties, Y-R A and Y-R B can be removed from a compound of formula (XXIp) using a suitable method to obtain a compound of formula (XXI).
  • R 3 and R 4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVII).
  • the C- 5 keto group of the compound of formula (XXI) can be reduced to a secondary hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) or an enzyme to form a compound of formula (XV), including (XV-A) and/or (XV-B), wherein R 3 and R 4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXII).
  • a suitable reducing agent e.g., sodium borohydride
  • an enzyme e.g., sodium borohydride
  • R 3 and R 4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXII).
  • the compound of formula (XV) can then be used to obtain Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof following Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7- 9, 7-10, and 7-11 described herein.
  • the compounds of formulae (XXIp), (XXI), and (XV) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
  • each Re can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: each R ⁇ can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C]-C 24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl;,
  • a compound of formula (XVI) can be formed as described above with respect to Schemes 9-1 and 9-3. If desired, the C- 13 primary hydroxy group can be protected during the oxidation of C-15 hydroxy group of compounds of formulae (XXXlX) and (XXXIXp) and then removed if desired.
  • a compound of formula (XVI) can be formed as described above with respect to Schemes 9-1, 9-2, 9-3, and 9-4.
  • a compound of formula (XV) obtained via the methods of Schemes 9-7 and/or 9-8 can then used to synthesize Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof following Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, and 7-1 1 as described herein.
  • the compounds of formula (XXXVIIIp) and (XXXIXp) can have the same structures and/or stereochemistry as the corresponding nonprotected compounds of formulae (XXXVIII) and (XXXIX) except that the keto carbonyl group is protected with a suitable protecting group(s).
  • Salinosporamide A (compound XVI-IA) can be obtained from a compound of formula (XXII) 5 wherein R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl, R3 is methyl and X is chlorine.
  • the compound of formula (XXII-I) can be converted to a compound of formula (XVI-B). If desired, the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be inverted in a single step or a multistep process to give a compound of formula (XVI-A), as previously described herein.
  • Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof can also be obtained from the compound of formula (XXI) and/or (XXIp).
  • the C- 13 primary hydoxy of the compounds of formulae (XXI) and (XXIp) can be modified following the procedures shown in Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, and 7-11 described herein.
  • Reduction of the C-5 keto group to a hydroxy group using an appropriate reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) to produce Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof can take place at any step shown in Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, and 7-11.
  • an appropriate reducing agent e.g., sodium borohydride
  • the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted at any time using one of the methods described herein or one known to those skilled in the art.
  • the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted in the compound of formula (XV).
  • the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted in a one step process as described herein (e.g., by a Mitsunobu transformation). The inversion can also take place in multistep process.
  • the C-5 secondary hydroxy group can be oxidized using an appropriate oxidizing agent (e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP/NMO, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC) to a keto group and then reduced to a hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent such as sodium borohydride.
  • a suitable reducing agent such as sodium borohydride.
  • the keto group can be reduced via selective enzymatic transformation.
  • the reducing enzyme is a ketoreductase such as KRED-EXP-ClA and/or KRED-EXP-B 1 Y.
  • R 4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl in any of the compounds and methods described herein.
  • R 4 is 2-cyclohexenyl in any of the compounds and methods described herein. In some embodiments, R 4 cannot be isopropyl in any of the compounds and methods described herein. In other embodiments, R4 is isopropyl in any of the compounds and methods described herein.
  • the combined organic phase was dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • the crude product was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (5 cm ID x 45 cm) using a solvent gradient of 100% hexanes (1.5 L) to 1.5% EtOAc/hexanes (3 L) to 2.5% EtOAc/hexanes (1 L) to 4% EtOAc/hexanes (700 mL) to afford pure product (14.5g, 0.073 mol, 38.5% yield).
  • the crude product was purified by fractional distillation (130 0 C oil bath, 90-95 0 C bp) under high vacuum (12 mm Hg) to afford product, the ester precursor of the compound (II- 1) (66% yield).
  • Method B A mixture of compound IH-I (175 mg, 0.493 mmol) and iodine (12.52 mg, 0.0493 mmol) in acetone (20 mL) was refluxed at 56 0 C for one hour. The reaction mixture was then cooled to RT, the acetone was removed under reduced pressure, and the crude reaction product was dissolved in CH 2 Cb (20 mL). The CH 2 Cl 2 solution was washed successively with 5% aqueous sodium thiosulfate (10 mL), H 2 O (10 mL) and brine (10 mL).
  • Method C A mixture of compound III-l (500 rng 5 1.40 mmol) and LiBF 4 (200 mg, 2.1 mmol) in CH 3 CN (6 mL, wet with 2% H 2 O) was stirred at 70 0 C for 1.5 to 2 hrs (the reaction progress can be monitored by LC-MS). The above reaction mixture was then quickly cooled to 0 0 C, filtered through a short silica plug and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • the compound V-IA was also characterized by 13 C-NMR (CDCl 3 , 125 MHz) and 1 H - 1 H COSY NMR (CDCl 3 , 500 MHz). See Figures 9 and 10. The structure of compound V-IA was confirmed by x-ray crystallography, as shown in Figure 11.
  • Compound V-IB was purified by reversed phase HPLC using the solvent gradient of 30% to 70% CH 3 CN/H 2 O over 30 min, at a flow rate of 14.5 mL/min to yield pure compound.
  • reaction mixture was then filtered through a membrane filter (0.2 ⁇ rn) and purified by normal phase HPLC using a Phenomenex Luna 1Ou Silica column (25 cm x 21.2 mm ID), ELSD detector, a solvent gradient of 25% to 80% EtOAc/hexanes over 19 min, 80 to 100% EtOAc/hexanes over 1 min, holding at 100% EtOAc for 5 min, at a flow rate of 14.5 ml/min to afford a pure compound of formula XXII-I.
  • the compound of formula XVI-IA was synthesized by reducing the keto group of the compound of formula XXII-I with a common reducing agent(s) under various reaction conditions as shown in the Table 1.
  • KRED-EXP-BlY ketoreductase was superior to KRED-EXP-ClA in the conversion of XXII-I to XVI-IA. Doubling the concentrations of KRED-EXP-BlY and GDH and decreasing the reaction time resulted in better yields and minimal decomposition of product (2-5%).
  • Method A To a solution of X-l b B (400 mg, 0.88 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added aqueous HCl (0.5 M, 2 mL). The reaction mixture was warmed to 60 0 C and stirred for 10 hrs at this temperature. The above reaction mixture was diluted with H 2 O (20 mL), then extracted with EtOAc (2 X 20 mL) and CH 2 Cl 2 (3 X 20 mL). The combined organic phase was dried over MgS ⁇ 4 and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Method B Sodium metal (Na, 30mg, 1.30 mmol) was dissolved in liquid ammonia (3 mL) at -78 0 C and the resultant dark blue mixture was stirred for 5 min. A solution of X-l b B (30mg, 0.066 mmol) in dry THF (0.5 ml) was slowly added to the above reaction mixture and stirred at -78 0 C for an additional 2 hrs. Solid ammonium chloride (NH 4 Cl, 40mg) was added slowly to the reaction mixture, which was then allowed to warm to RT (by removing the dry ice-acetone cold bath). Ammonia was evaporated during warm up. The white residue was washed with brine and extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was concentrated to afford crude hemiacetal, which was directly used in the next reaction without purification.
  • the aqueous phase was acidified with HCl (0.5 M) to pH 3.0 and extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (3 x 5 mL).
  • the combined organic phase was dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a white solid residue which was purified by reversed phase HPLC using an ACE 5 ⁇ C18 column (150 x 21 mm ID) and a solvent gradient of 10% to 100% CH 3 CN/H 2 O/0.05%TFA over 22 min, holding at 100% CH 3 CN/0.05%TFA for 3 min at a flow rate of 14.5 mL/min to afford the carboxylic acid XXVI-IB-Bz (66 mg, 0.16 mmol, 62.6% yield over two steps).
  • the carboxylic acid XXVI-IB-Bz was characterized by 1 H-NMR (CD 3 OD, 500 MHz), and 13 C-NMR (CD 3 OD, 125 MHz). See Figures 39 and 40. MS (ESI) m/z 418.2 [M+Hj + .
  • the compound XV-IB was characterized by 1 H- NMR (acetone-de, 500 MHz), and 13 C-NMR (acetone-d 6 , 125 MHz). See Figures 42 and 43. MS (ESI) m/z 296 [M+H] + .
  • the substrate used was suc-LLVY-AMC, a fluorogenic peptide substrate specifically cleaved by the chymotrypsin-like activity of the proteasome.
  • Assays were performed at a proteasome concentration of 1 ⁇ g/ml in a final volume of 200 ⁇ l in 96-weII Costar microtiter plates. Both the synthetic and fermentation compounds XVI-IA were tested as eight-point dose response curves with final concentrations ranging from 500 nM to 158 pM. After addition of test compounds to the rabbit 2OS proteasomes, the samples were preincubated at 37 0 C for five minutes in a temperature controlled Fluoroskan Ascent 96- well microplate reader (Thermo Electron, Waltham, MA).
  • the substrate was diluted 25-fold in SDS-containing assay buffer.
  • the reactions were initiated by the addition of 10 ⁇ l of the diluted substrate and the plates were returned to the plate reader.
  • the final concentration of substrate in the reactions was 20 ⁇ M.
  • the IC 5 0 values (the drug concentration at which 50% of the maximal relative fluorescence is inhibited) were calculated by Prism (GraphPad Software) using a sigmoidal dose-response, variable slope model.
  • Results (IC 50 values) shown in Table 4 and in Figures 57-59 illustrate that both synthetic and fermentation compounds XVI-lA_have similar inhibitory activity against the chymotrypsin-like, trypsin-like and caspase-like activities of the 2OS proteasome in vitro.
  • TABLE 4 IN VITRO INHIBITION OF PURIFIED RABBIT 2OS PROTEASOMES BY THE SYNTHETIC AND FERMENTATION COMPOUNDS OF FORMULA XVI-IA
  • RPMI 8226 (ATCC 5 CCL-155), the human multiple myeloma cell line, was cultured in RPMI 1640 medium supplemented with 2 mM L-Glutamine, 1% Penicillin/Streptomycin, 10 mM HEPES and 10% Fetal Bovine Serum at 37 0 C, 5% CO 2 and 95% humidified air.
  • test compounds prepared in DMSO were appropriately diluted in culture medium and added to lxlO 6 /ml RMPI 8226 cells at final concentration of 1, 5 or 10 nM. DMSO was used as the vehicle control at a final concentration of 0.1%.
  • DMPI 8226 cells Following 1 hr incubation of RMPI 8226 cells with the compounds, the cells were pelleted by centrifugation at 2,000 rpm for 10 sec at room temperature and washed 3X with ice-cold IX Dubach's Phosphate-Buffered Saline (DPBS, Mediatech, Herndon, VA). DPBS washed cells were lysed on ice for 15 min in lysis buffer (20 mM HEPES 5 0.5 mM EDTA 5 0.05% Triton X-100, pH 7.3) supplemented with protease inhibitor cocktail (Roche Diagnostics, Indianapolis, IN).
  • lysis buffer (20 mM HEPES 5 0.5 mM EDTA 5 0.05% Triton X-100, pH 7.3) supplemented with protease inhibitor cocktail (Roche Diagnostics, Indianapolis, IN).
  • Protein concentration was determined by the BCA protein assay kit (Pierce Biotechnology, Rockford, IL).
  • the chymotrypsin-like activity of the 2OS proteasome in the RPMI 8226 cell lysates was measured by using the Suc-LLVY-AMC fluorogenic peptide substrate in the proteasome assay buffer (20 mM HEPES, 0.5 mM EDTA 5 pH 8.0) containing a final concentration of 0.035% SDS.
  • the final concentration of Suc-LL VY-AMC and DMSO was 20 ⁇ M and 0.2%, respectively.
  • the activity of test compound was expressed as % inhibition as normalized to the proteasome activity observed in the DMSO treated control cells.
  • Results in Table 5 show that exposure of RPMI 8226 cells to the fermentation or synthetic compounds XVI-lA_resulted in a dose-dependent inhibition of the 2OS proteasome chymotrypsin-like activity. In addition, a similar inhibition profile was observed when cells were exposed to compound XVI-I A_obtained via fermentation or to compound XVI-IA obtained synthetically.

Abstract

The present invention relates to certain compounds and to methods for the preparation of certain compounds that can be used in the fields of chemistry and medicine. Specifically, described herein are methods for the preparation of various compounds and intermediates, and the compounds and intermediates themselves. More specifically, described herein are methods for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs from a compound of formula (V).

Description

TOTAL SYNTHESIS OF SALINOSPORAMIDE A AND ANALOGS THEREOF
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Nos. 60/790,168, entitled "Total Synthesis of Salinosporamide A and Analogs Thereof," filed April 6, 2006; 60/816,968, entitled "Total Synthesis of Salinosporamide A and Analogs Thereof," filed June 27, 2006; 60/836,155, entitled "Total Synthesis of Salinosporamide A and Analogs Thereof," filed August 7, 2006; 60/844,132, entitled "Total Synthesis of Salinosporamide A and Analogs Thereof," filed September 19, 2006; and 60/885,379, entitled "Total Synthesis of Salinosporamide A and Analogs Thereof," filed January, 17, 2007, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety, including any drawings.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Field of the Invention
[0002] The present invention relates to certain compounds and to methods for the preparation of certain compounds that can be used in the fields of chemistry and medicine.
Description of the Related Art
[0003] Cancer is a leading cause of death in the United States. Despite significant efforts to find new approaches for treating cancer, the primary treatment options remain surgery, chemotherapy and radiation therapy, either alone or in combination. Surgery and radiation therapy, however, are generally useful only for fairly defined types of cancer, and are of limited use for treating patients with disseminated disease. Chemotherapy is the method that is generally useful in treating patients with metastatic cancer or diffuse cancers such as leukemias. Although chemotherapy can provide a therapeutic benefit, it often fails to result in cure of the disease due to the patient's cancer cells becoming resistant to the chemotherapeutic agent. Due, in part, to the likelihood of cancer cells becoming resistant to a chemotherapeutic agent, such agents are commonly used in combination to treat patients. [0004] Similarly, infectious diseases caused, for example, by bacteria, fungi and protozoa are becoming increasingly difficult to treat and cure. For example, more and more bacteria, fungi and protozoa are developing resistance to current antibiotics and chemotherapeutic agents. Examples of such microbes include Bacillus, Leishmania, Plasmodium and Trypanosoma.
[0005] Furthermore, a growing number of diseases and medical conditions are classified as inflammatory diseases. Such diseases include conditions such as asthma to cardiovascular diseases. These diseases continue to affect larger and larger numbers of people worldwide despite new therapies and medical advances.
[0006] Therefore, a need exists for additional chemotherapeutics, antimicrobial agents, and anti-inflammatory agents to treat cancer, inflammatory diseases and infectious disease. A continuing effort is being made by individual investigators, academia and companies to identify new, potentially useful chemotherapeutic and antimicrobial agents.
[0007] Marine-derived natural products are a rich source of potential new anticancer agents and anti-microbial agents. The oceans are massively complex and house a diverse assemblage of microbes that occur in environments of extreme variations in pressure, salinity, and temperature. Marine microorganisms have therefore developed unique metabolic and physiological capabilities that not only ensure survival in extreme and varied habitats, but also offer the potential to produce metabolites that would not be observed from terrestrial microorganisms (Okami, Y. 1993 J Mar Biotechnol 1:59). Representative structural classes of such metabolites include terpenes, peptides, polyketides, and compounds with mixed biosynthetic origins. Many of these molecules have demonstrable anti-tumor, anti-bacterial, anti-fungal, anti-inflammatory or immunosuppressive activities (Bull, A.T. et al. 2000 Microbiol MoI Biol Rev 64:573; Cragg, G.M. & DJ. Newman 2002 Trends Pharmacol Sci 23:404; Kerr, R.G. & S.S. Kerr 1999 Exp Opin Ther Patents 9:1207; Moore, B.S 1999 Nat Prod Rep 16:653; Faulkner, DJ. 2001 Nat Prod Rep 18:1; Mayer, A. M. & V.K. Lehmann 2001 Anticancer Res 21:2489). validating the utility of this source for isolating invaluable therapeutic agents. Further, the isolation of novel anti-cancer and anti-microbial agents that represent alternative mechanistic classes to those currently on the market will help to address resistance concerns, including any mechanism-based resistance that may have been engineered into pathogens for bioterrorism purposes. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0008] The embodiments disclosed herein generally relate to the total synthesis of chemical compounds, including heterocyclic compounds and analogs thereof. Some embodiments are directed to the chemical compound and intermediate compounds. Other embodiments are directed to the individual methods of synthesizing the chemical compound and intermediate compounds.
[0009] An embodiment disclosed herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (V):
Figure imgf000004_0001
[OOIOJ One embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing an intermediate compound of formula (V).
[0011] Another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing an intermediate compound of formula (X).
[0012] Still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing an intermediate compound of formula (XV).
[00131 Yet still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing an intermediate compound of formula (XVII).
[0014] One embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (V).
[0015] Another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (VI).
[0016] Still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (X). [0017] Still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (Xp).
[0018] Yet still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XI).
[0019] One embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XV).
[0020] Another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XVII).
[0021] Still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XVIIp).
[0022] Yet still another embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XVIII).
[0023] One embodiment described herein relates to a method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (XXIII).
[0024] Some embodiments described herein relate to the individual methods of synthesizing compounds of .formula (III), (IV), (VI), (VI), (VII), (VIII), (IX), (X), (XV), (XVI), (XXII), (XXIII), (XXIV), (XXV), (XXVI), (XXVII), (XXVIII) and protected derivatives thereof.
[0025] Other embodiments described herein relate to the individual compounds of formula (III), (IV), (VI), (VI), (VII), (VIII), (IX), (X), (XV)5 (XVI), (XXII) (XXIII) (XXIV), (XXV) (XXVI), (XXVII), (XXVIII) and protected derivatives thereof.
[0026] One embodiment described herein relates to a method of forming a compound of formula (X) from a compound of formula (V) comprising the steps of: cleaving the carbon-carbon double bond of the compound of formula (V) and cyclizing the cleaved double bond with the tertiary hydroxy group; transforming -COOR2 to an aldehyde; and adding R4 to the aldehyde using an organometallic moiety containing at least one R4, wherein R2 and R4 are described herein [0027] An embodiment described herein relates to a method of forming a compound of formula (XV) from a compound of formula (X) comprising the steps of: cleaving an aminal group; removing PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal; and forming a four membered lactone ring, wherein PGi can be a protecting group moiety described herien. In some embodiments, the cleaving of the aminal group can occur before the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, and before the formation of the four membered lactone ring. In other embodiments, the cleaving of the aminal group can occur after the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, but before the formation of the four membered ring.
[0028] Another embodiment described herein relates to a method of forming a compound of formula (XVII) from a compound of formula (V) comprising the steps of: cleaving the carbon-carbon double bond of the compound of formula (V) and cyclizing the cleaved double bond with the tertiary hydroxy group; and adding R4 after cyclization with the tertiary hydroxy group using an organometallic moiety containing at least one R4, wherein R4 is described herein;
[0029] On embodiment described herein relates to a method of forming a compound of formula (XXII) from a compound of formula (XVII) comprising the steps of: cleaving an aminal group; removing PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal; forming a four membered ring via a lactonization reaction; and removing any protecting groups on a ketone, wherein PGi can be a protecting group moiety described herien. In some embodiments, the cleaving of the aminal group can occur before the removal of PGj and reductively opening the hemiacetal, and before the formation of the four membered ring via a lactonization reaction. In other embodiments, the cleaving of the aminal group is after the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, but before the formation of the four membered ring via a lactonization reaction.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0030] The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and form part of the specification, merely illustrate certain preferred embodiments of the present invention. Together with the remainder of the specification, they are meant to serve to explain preferred modes of making certain compounds of the invention to those of skilled in the art. In the drawings:
[0031] Figure 1 shows the chemical structure of Salinosporamide A. [0032] Figure 2 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (1-1 ) in CDCl3.
[0033] Figure 3 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the ester precursor to the compound of formula (II- 1 ) in CDCl3.
[0034] Figure 4 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the protected ester precursor of the compound of formula (II- 1) in CDCI3.
[0035] Figure 5 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (II- 1) in CDCl3.
[0036] Figure 6a shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (III- 1) in CDCl3.
[0037] Figure 6b shows a LC-MS of the compound of formula (III- 1 ).
[0038] Figure 7a shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IV- 1) in CDCI3.
[0039] Figure 7b shows a NOESY spectrum of the compound of formula (IV- 1) in CDCl3.
[0040] Figure 7c shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IV- IA) in CDCl3.
[0041] Figure 7d shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IV- IB) in CDCl3.
[0042] Figure 7e shows a LC-MS of the compound of formula (IV-I).
[0043] Figure 8 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IA) in CDCl3.
[0044] Figure 9 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IA) in CDCl3.
[0045] Figure 10 shows a 1H-1H COSY NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V-IA) in CDCl3.
[0046] Figure 11 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (V- IA).
[0047] Figure 12 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (VI- 1) in CDCl3.
[0048] Figure 13 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (VII-Ia) in CDCl3.
[0049] Figure 14 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (VII-Ib) in CDCl3. [0050] Figure 15 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (VII-
Ib).
[0051] Figure 16 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (VIII-Ib) in CDCl3.
[0052] Figure 17 shows a 1H NMR of the compound of formula (VIII-I8) in CDCl3
[0053] Figure 18 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IX- lb) in CDCl3.
[0054] Figure 19 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (IX- la) in CDCl3.
[0055] Figure 20 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- lbB) in CDCl3
[0056] Figure 21 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- lbB) in CDCl3.
[0057] Figure 22 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (X- IbB).
[0058] Figure 23 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- laB) in CDCl3.
[0059] Figure 24 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- I3B) in CDCl3.
[0060] Figure 25 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IB) in CDCl3.
[0061] Figure 26 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (V- IB).
[0062] Figure 27 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IC) in CDCl3.
[0063] Figure 28 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IC) In CDCl3.
[0064] Figure 29 shows a NOESY spectrum of the compound of formula (V- IC) in CDCl3.
[0065] Figure 30 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIX-I) in CDCl3.
[0066] Figure 31 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIX-I) in CDCl3. [00671 Figure 32 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIII-IB) in CDCl3.
[0068] Figure 33 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIII-IB) in CDCl3.
[0069] Figure 34 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXIV-IB-Bz) in CDCl3.
[0070] Figure 35 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXV-IB-Bz) in CDCl3.
[0071] Figure 36 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXV-IB-Bz) in CDCl3.
[0072] Figure 37 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVp- IB-Bz-TMS) in CDCl3.
[0073] Figure 38 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVp- IB-Bz-TMS) in CDCl3.
[0074] Figure 39 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVI-IB-Bz) in CD3OD.
[0075] Figure 40 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVI-IB-Bz) in CD3OD.
[0076] Figure 41 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXVIII- IB-TBS) in CDCl3.
[0077] Figure 42 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XV- 1 B) in acetone-d6.
[0078] Figure 43 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XV-IB) in acetone-d5.
[0079] Figure 44 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XVI-IB) produced from the compound of formula (XV-IB) produced synthetically in CDCl3.
[0080] Figure 45 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XVI-IB) produced from the compound of formula (XV-IB) produced synthetically in
CDCl3.
[0081] Figure 46 shows 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XXII-I) produced from the compound of formula (XVI-IB) obtained synthetically in CDCl3. [0082] Figure 47 shows 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XVI- IA) produced from the compound of formula (XXII-I) obtained synthetically in DMSO- d6.
[0083] Figure 48 shows a comparison of 1H NMR spectra of compound (XVI- IA) produced synthetically and from fermentation.
[0084] Figure 49 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (XVI-IA) produced from the compound of formula (XXII-I) obtained synthetically in DMSOd6.
[0085] Figure 50 shows a comparison of 13C NMR spectra of compound (XVI-IA) produced synthetically and from fermentation.
[0086] Figure 51 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of cyclohexenyltributyltin in CDCl3.
[0087] Figure 52 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- la) in CDCl3.
[0088] Figure 53 s shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X-la) in CDCl3.
]0089] Figure 54 shows a 1H NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- Ib) in CDCl3.
[0090] Figure 55 shows a 13C NMR spectrum of the compound of formula (X- Ib) in CDCl3.
[0091] Figure 56 shows the crystal structure of the compound of formula (X-
Ib).
[0092] Figure 57 shows a plot of the inhibition of the chymotrypsin-like activity of 2OS proteasomes by the synthetic and fermentation compounds of formula (XVI-IA).
[0093] Figure 58 shows a plot of the inhibition of the trypsin-like activity of 2OS proteasomes by the synthetic and fermentation compounds of formula (XVI-IA).
[0094] Figure 59 shows a plot of the inhibition of the caspase-like activity of 2OS proteasomes by the synthetic and fermentation compounds of formula (XVI-IA).
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT [0095] Numerous references are cited herein. The references cited herein, including the U.S. patents cited herein, are each to be considered incorporated by reference in their entirety into this specification. [0096] Embodiments of the invention include, but are not limited to, methods for the preparation of various compounds and intermediates, and the compounds and intermediates themselves. In some embodiments, one or more substituents, one or more compounds, or groups of compounds can be specifically excluded in any one or more of the methods or compounds as described more fully below.
[0097] Salinosporamide A and its analogs thereof have various biological activities. For example, the compounds have chemosensitizing activity, anti-microbial, anti-inflammation, radiosensitizing, and anti-cancer activity. Studies have been conducted that show Salinosporamide A and its analogs have proteasome inhibitory activity, effect NF-κB / IKB signaling pathway, and have anti-anthrax activity. Salinosporamide A and several analogs, as well as biological activity of the same, are described in U.S. Provisional Patent Applications Nos., 60/480270, filed June 20, 2003; 60/566952, filed April 30, 2004; 60/627461, filed November 12, 2004; 60/633379, filed December 3, 2004; 60/643922, filed January 13, 2005; 60/658884, filed March 4, 2005; 60/676533, filed April 29, 2005; 60/567336, filed April 30, 2004; 60/580838, filed June 18, 2004; 60/591 190, filed July 26, 2004; 60/627462, filed November 12, 2004; 60/644132, filed January 13, 2005; and 60/659385, filed March 4, 2005; U.S. Patent Applications Nos., 10/871368, filed June 18, 2004; 11/1 18260, filed April 29, 2005; 11/412,476, filed April 27, 2006; and 11/453374, filed June 15, 2006; and International Patent Applications Nos., PCT/US2004/019543, filed June 18, 2004; PCT/US2005/044091, filed December 2, 2005; PCT/US2005/014846, filed April 29, 2005; and PCT/US2006/016104, filed April 27, 2006; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
[0098] Provided herein are methods for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs through an intermediate compound of formula (V):
Figure imgf000011_0001
[0099] The compound of formula (V) can be synthesized from readily available starting materials, as described herein. The compound of formula (V) may be subsequently converted to Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof. For example Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof may be synthesized according to Scheme A. Scheme A
Figure imgf000012_0001
[0100] For the compounds described herein, each stereogenic carbon can be of R or S configuration. Although the specific compounds exemplified in this application can be depicted in a particular configuration, compounds having either the opposite stereochemistry at any given chiral center or mixtures thereof are also envisioned unless otherwise specified. When chiral centers are found in the derivatives of this invention, it is to be understood that the compounds encompasses all possible stereoisomers unless otherwise indicated.
[0101] The term "substituted" has its ordinary meaning, as found in numerous contemporary patents from the related art. See, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 6,509,331; 6,506,787; 6,500,825; 5,922,683; 5,886,210; 5,874,443; and 6,350,759; all of which are incorporated herein in their entireties by reference. Examples of suitable substituents include but are not limited to hydrogen, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, alkyl amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, keto, thioketo, thiol, thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-H, -SO2-OH, - SO2-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl, heteroaryl, boronate alkyl, boronic acid, (OH)2B-alkyl, phosphate and phosphate esters, phosphonooxy, phosphonooxyalkyl, azido, azidoalkyl, ammonium, carboxyalkyl, a salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylamino- a salt of an alkylamino, dialkylamino, a salt of a dialkylamino, alkylthio, arylthio, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonyl, alkanesulfinyl, alkoxysulfinyl, thiocyano, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, sulfoalkyl, a salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, a salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, a salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, a salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, a salt of a pyridinylalkyl, a salt of a heteroarylalkyl guanidino, a salt of a guanidino, and guanidinoalkyl. Each of the substituents can be further substituted. The other above- listed patents also provide standard definitions for the term "substituted" that are well- understood by those of skill in the art.
[0102] Whenever a group is described as "optionally substituted" the group may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents as described herein.
[0103] As used herein, any "R" group(s) such as, without limitation, R5 R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, Re, R7, R8, RA and RB represent substituents that can be attached to the indicated atom. An R group may be substituted or unsubstituted. If two "R" groups are covalently bonded to the same atom or to adjacent atoms, then they may be "taken together" as defined herein to form a cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or heterocycle. For example, without limitation, if Ri3 and R^ of an NRiaRib group are indicated to be "taken together," it means that they are covalently bonded to one another to form a ring:
Figure imgf000013_0001
[0104] The term "alkyl," as used herein, means any unbranched or branched, substituted or unsubstituted, saturated hydrocarbon, with C1-C24 preferred, and Ci-C6 hydrocarbons being preferred, with methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, and tert-butyl, and pentyl being most preferred.
[0105] The term "alkenyl," as used herein, means any unbranched or branched, substituted or unsubstituted, unsaturated hydrocarbon containing one or more double bonds. Some examples of alkenyl groups include allyl, homo-allyl, vinyl, crotyl, butenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, heptenyl and octenyl.
[0106] The term "alkynyl" as used herein, means any unbranched or branched, substituted or unsubstituted, unsaturated hydrocarbon with one or more triple bonds [0107] The term "cycloalkyl" refers to any non-aromatic, substituted or unsubstituted, hydrocarbon ring, preferably having five to twelve atoms comprising the ring. Furthermore, in the present context, the term "cycloalkyl" comprises fused ring systems such that the definition covers bicyclic and tricyclic structures.
[0108] The term "cycloalkenyl" refers to any non-aromatic, substituted or unsubstituted, hydrocarbon ring that includes a double bond, preferably having five to twelve atoms comprising the ring. Furthermore, in the present context, the term "cycloalkenyl" comprises fused ring systems such that the definition covers bicyclic and tricyclic structures.
[0109] The term "cycloalkynyl" refers to any non-aromatic, substituted or unsubstituted, hydrocarbon ring that includes a triple bond, preferably having five to twelve atoms comprising the ring. Furthermore, in the present context, the term "cycloalkynyl" comprises fused ring systems such that the definition covers bicyclic and tricyclic structures.
[0110] The term "acyl" refers to hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, or aryl connected, as substituents, via a carbonyl group. Examples include formyl, acetyl, propanoyl, benzoyl, and acryl. An acyl may be substituted or unsubstituted.
[0111] In the present context the term "aryl" is intended to mean a carbocyclic aromatic ring or ring system. Moreover, the term "aryl" includes fused ring systems wherein at least two aryl rings, or at least one aryl and at least one C3-8-cycloalkyl share at least one chemical bond. Some examples of "aryl" rings include optionally substituted phenyl, naphthalenyl, phenanthrenyl, anthracenyl, tetralinyl, fluorenyl, indenyl, and indanyl. An aryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted.
[0112] In the present context, the term "heteroaryl" is intended to mean a heterocyclic aromatic group where one or more carbon atoms in an aromatic ring have been replaced with one or more heteroatoms selected from the group comprising nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorous, and oxygen. Furthermore, in the present context, the term "heteroaryl" comprises fused ring systems wherein at least one aryl ring and at least one heteroaryl ring, at least two heteroaryl rings, at least one heteroaryl ring and at least one heterocyclyl ring, or at least one heteroaryl ring and at least one C3.g-cycloalkyl ring share at least one chemical bond. A heteroaryl can be substituted or unsubstituted.
[0113] The terms "heterocycle" and "heterocyclyl" are intended to mean three-, four-, five-, six-, seven-, and eight-membered rings wherein carbon atoms together with from 1 to 3 heteroatoms constitute said ring. A heterocycle may optionally contain one or more unsaturated bonds situated in such a way, however, that an aromatic π- electron system does not arise. The heteroatoms are independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen. A heterocycle may further contain one or more carbonyl or thiocarbonyl functionalities, so as to make the definition include oxo-systems and thio- systems such as lactams, lactones, cyclic imides, cyclic thioimides, cyclic carbamates, and the like. Heterocyclyl rings may optionally also be fused to at least other heterocyclyl ring, at least one C3-8-cycloalkyl ring, at least one C3.g-cycloalkenyl ring and/or at least one C3-8-cycloalkynyl ring such that the definition includes bicyclic and tricyclic structures. Examples of benzo-fused heterocyclyl groups include, but are not limited to, benzimidazolidinone, tetrahydroquinoline, and methylenedioxybenzene ring structures. Some examples of "heterocycles" include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrothiopyran, 4H- pyran, tetrahydropyran, piperidine, 1,3-dioxin, 1,3-dioxane, 1,4-dioxin, 1,4-dioxane, piperazine, 1 ,3-oxathiane, 1,4-oxathiin, 1 ,4-oxathiane, tetrahydro-l,4-thiazine, 2H- 1,2- oxazine, maleimide, succinimide, barbituric acid, thiobarbituric acid, dioxopiperazine, hydantoin, dihydrouracil, morpholine, trioxane, hexahydro-l,3,5-triazine, tetrahydrothiophene, tetrahydrofuran, pyridine, pyridinium, pyrroline, pyrrolidine, pyrrolidone, pyrrolidine, pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, imidazoline, imidazolidine, 1,3- dioxole, 1,3-dioxolane, 1,3-dithiole, 1 ,3-dithiolane, isoxazoline, isoxazolidine, oxazoline, oxazolidine, oxazolidinone, thiazoline, thiazolidine, and 1,3-oxathiolane. A heterocycle group of this invention may be substituted or unsubstituted.
[0114] The term "alkoxy" refers to any unbranched, or branched, substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated ether, with Ci-Ce unbranched, saturated, unsubstituted ethers being preferred, with methoxy being preferred, and also with dimethyl, diethyl, methyl-isobutyl, and methyl-tert-butyl ethers also being preferred.
[0115] The term "cycloalkoxy" refers to any non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring comprising an oxygen heteroatom, preferably having five to twelve atoms comprising the ring. A cycloalkoxy can be substituted or unsubstituted.
[0116] The term "alkoxy carbonyl" refers to any linear, branched, cyclic, saturated, unsaturated, aliphatic or aromatic alkoxy attached to a carbonyl group. The examples include methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, propyloxycarbonyl group, isopropyloxycarbonyl group, butoxycarbonyl group, sec-butoxycarbonyl group, tert-butoxycarbonyl group, cyclopentyloxycarbonyl group, cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, benzyloxycarbonyl group, allyloxycarbonyl group, phenyl oxycarbonyl group, pyridyloxycarbonyl group, and the like. An alkoxy carbonyl may be substituted or unsubstituted.
[0117] The term "(cycloalkyl)alkyl is understood as a cycloalkyl group connected, as a substituent, via a lower alkylene. The (cycloalkyl)alkyl group and lower alkylene of a (cycloalkyl)alkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted.
[0118] The terms "(heterocycle)alkyl" and "(heterocyclyl)alkyl" are understood as a heterocycle group connected, as a substituent, via a lower alkylene. The heterocycle group and the lower alkylene of a (heterocycle)alkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted.
[0119] The term "arylalkyl" is intended to mean an aryl group connected, as a substituent, via a lower alkylene, each as defined herein. The aryl group and lower alkylene of an arylalky may be substituted or unsubstituted. Examples include benzyl, substituted benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenyIpropyl, and naphthylalkyl.
[0120] The term "heteroarylalkyl" is understood as heteroaryl groups connected, as substituents, via a lower alkylene, each as defined herein. The heteroaryl and lower alkylene of a heteroarylalkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. Examples include 2-thienylmethyl, 3-thienylmethyl, furylmethyl, thienylethyl, pyrrolylalkyl, pyridylalkyl, isoxazolylalkyl, imidazolylalkyl, and their substituted as well as benzo-fused analogs.
[0121] The term "halogen atom," as used herein, means any one of the radio- stable atoms of column 7 of the Periodic Table of the Elements, i.e., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine, with bromine and chlorine being preferred.
[0122] As employed herein, the following terms have their accepted meaning in the chemical literature.
9-BBN : 9-borabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane
BF3.Et2O :borontrifluoride diethyl etherate
Bn :benzyl
BnOH :benzyl alcohol
BOPCl :bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphinic chloride t-BuOH :ført-butanol//erf-butyl alcohol t-BuOK :potassium tert-butoxide
Bz : benzoyl
DMIPS :Dimethyl wo-propylsilyl
ESI relectrospray ionization EtOAc :ethyl acetate
FDH :formate dehydroganase
GDH rglucose dehydrogenase
ID rinternal diameter
IPA risopropyl alcohol
LC-MS :liquid chromatography - mass spectrometry
LDA ' :lithium diisopropylamide
MS :mass spectrum
MsCl rmethanesulfonyl chloride
NaOMe : sodium methoxide
NaOEt : sodium ethoxide
NMO :N-methylmorpholine N-oxide
NMR :nuclear magnetic resonance
Pb(OAc)4 :lead tetraacetate
PCC rpyridinium chlorochromate
PDC :pyridinium dicromate
PPTS rpyridinium p-toluene sulfonate
PTSA :p-toluene sulfonic acid
RT :room temperature
SAR -.structure-activity relationship
TMS :trimethylsilyl
TBS :t-butyldimethylsilyl
TES :triethylsilyl
THF .tetrahydrofuran
TFA :trifluoroacetic acid
TPAP :tetrapropylammonium perruthenate
[0123] The terms "organometallic moiety" and "organometallic moieties" as used herein refer to any chemical compound that contains a metal-element bond(s) of a largely covalent character. The term "metal" as used herein include those elements traditionally classified as metals (e.g., lithium, magnesium, zinc, and tin) and those elements classified as metalloids (e.g., boron).
[0124] The terms "protecting group moiety" and "protecting group moieties" as used herein refer to any atom or group of atoms that is added to a molecule in order to prevent existing groups in the molecule from undergoing unwanted chemical reactions. Examples of protecting group moieties are described in T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3. Ed. John Wiley & Sons, 1999, and in J.F.W. McOmie, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry Plenum Press, 1973, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference. The protecting group moiety may be chosen in such a way, that they are stable to the reaction conditions applied and readily removed at a convenient stage using methodology known from the art. A non-limiting list of protecting groups include benzyl; substituted benzyl; alkylcarbonyls (e.g., t- butoxycarbonyl (BOC)); arylalkylcarbonyls (e.g., benzyloxycarbonyl, benzoyl); substituted methyl ether (e.g. methoxymethyl ether); substituted ethyl ether; a substituted benzyl ether; tetrahydropyranyl ether; silyl ethers (e.g., trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, or t-butyldiphenylsilyl); esters (e.g. benzoate ester); carbonates (e.g. methoxymethylcarbonate); sulfonates (e.g. tosylate, mesylate); acyclic ketal (e.g. dimethyl acetal); cyclic ketals (e.g., 1,3-dioxane or 1,3-dioxolanes); acyclic acetal; cyclic acetal; acyclic hemiacetal; cyclic hemiacetal; and cyclic dithioketals (e.g., 1,3-dithiane or 1 ,3-dithiolane). As used herein, any "PG" group(s) such as, without limitation, PGi, PG2 and PG3 represent a protecting group moiety.
[0125] The terms "pure," "purified," "substantially purified," and "isolated" as used herein refer to the compound of the embodiment being free of other, dissimilar compounds with which the compound, if found in its natural state, would be associated in its natural state. In certain embodiments described as "pure," "purified," "substantially purified," or "isolated" herein, the compound may comprise at least 0.5%, 1%, 5%, 10%, or 20%, and most preferably at least 50% or 75% of the mass, by weight, of a given sample.
[0126] The terms "derivative," "variant," or other similar term refers to a compound that is an analog of the other compound.
[0127] As shown in Schemes 1-4, the starting compounds of formulae (I) and (II) may be synthesized from readily available materials. As shown in Scheme 1-1, a compound of formula (I) can be synthesized from a serine ester salt, an aldehyde (e.g. t- butyl aldehyde) and a base (e.g., triethylamine) at elevated temperatures. In some embodiments, the serine ester salt can be a D-serine methylester salt which can form a compound of formula (I) with the stereochemistry shown in Scheme 1-2. Scheme 1-1
aldehyde/base
Figure imgf000019_0001
Figure imgf000019_0002
(D
Scheme 1-2
Figure imgf000019_0003
[0128] In some embodiments, a compound of formula (I) can have the structure shown above wherein Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci-6 alkyl; and R2 can be hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C i-6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl. In an embodiment when Rj is hydrogen, one skilled in the art would recognize that the stereochemistry at C-4 may not be retained upon conversion of a compound of formula (IV) to a compound of formula (V) shown below. In an embodiment when Ri is an unsubstituted or substituted Cue alkyl, one skilled in the art would recognize that the stereochemistry at C-4 would be retained upon conversion of a compound of formula (IV) to a compound of formula (V) shown below. As an example, a compound of formula (I) can have the following structure and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000019_0004
[0129] A compound of formula (II) can be synthesized according to Schemes 2, 3 and 4. The ester precursor of the compound of Formula II can be prepared according to Scheme 2, starting with a β-ketoester and a base (e.g., t-BuOK or NaH) and then adding an allyl halide.
-IS- Scheme 2
Figure imgf000020_0001
ester precursor of the compound of Formula II
[0130] In some embodiments, the ester precursor of the compound of formula (II) can have the structure shown above wherein R can be hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; and R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-O alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl. An exemplary ester precursor is the compound having the following structure:
Figure imgf000020_0002
[0131] The protected ester precursor of the compound of formula (II) can be prepared according to Scheme 3. The ketone carbonyl of the ester precursor can be protected using a suitable protecting group moiety/moieties, as described herein. One method for protecting the ketone carbonyl is shown in Scheme 3. Scheme 3
Figure imgf000020_0003
protected ester precursor of the compound of formula II [0132] In some embodiments, the protected ester precursor of the compound of formula (II) can have structure shown in Scheme 3 wherein R can be hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cue alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl; each Y can be an oxygen or sulfur; and RΛ and RB can be each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein RA and RB can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl.
[0133] For example, the ketone carbonyl may be protected by reacting the ester precursor with 1,2 dihydroxyethane to form a 1,3-dioxolane heterocyclic ring as shown below:
Figure imgf000021_0001
[0134] As shown in Scheme 4, the protected ester precursor of a compound of formula (II) can then be hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid equivalent using an appropriate acid such as TFA or PTSA to form a compound of formula (II). Scheme 4
Figure imgf000021_0002
[0135] In some embodiments, a compound of formula (II) can have the structure shown in Scheme 4 wherein R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl; each Y can be an oxygen or sulfur; and RA and RB can be each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-e alkynyl, wherein RA and RB can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl. As an example, the compound of formula (II) can have the following structure:
Figure imgf000022_0001
[0136] A method of preparing a compound of formula (V) from the starting compounds of formulae (I) and (II) is shown below in Scheme 5. Scheme S
Figure imgf000022_0002
[0137] In step (a) of Scheme 5, a compound of formula (III) can be formed by reacting a compound of formula (I) with a compound of formula (II) under suitable conditions wherein Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci-6 alkyl; R2 can be hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1.6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl; each Y can be an oxygen or sulfur; and RA and RB can be each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci.g alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-β alkynyl, wherein RA and RB can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl. For example, a compound of formula (I) can be added to a mixture containing a compound of formula (II), a mild base (e.g., triethylamine or N-methyl piperidine) and an acylating agent such as methanesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethanesulfonyl chloride or chloromethylformate.
[0138] As an example, the compounds of formulae (I), (II) and (III) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000023_0001
[0139] In one embodiment, the compounds of formulae (I)5 (II) and (III) can have the following structures: ,
Figure imgf000023_0002
(M) (IM) (III-l)
[0140] The compound of formula (III) can be deprotected to form a compound of formula (IV)5 as shown in step (b) of Scheme 5, wherein: Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci-g alkyl; R2 can be hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj .6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl; each Y can be an oxygen or sulfur; and RA and RB can be each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci^ alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein RA and RB can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl. One method for removing the ketone carbonyl protecting group (e.g., 1,3- dioxolane) includes reacting a compound of formula (III) with sodium iodide and a Lewis base such as cerium (III) chloride heptahydrate. A second method includes reacting a compound of formula (III) with iodine in acetone at an elevated temperature. Alternatively, a compound of formula (III) can be reacted with lithium tetrafluoroboride at an elevated temperature to form a compound of formula (IV). If Y is sulfur, the ketone carbonyl protecting group can be removed using various hydrolytic, oxidative and/or solid-state methods such as those described and cited in Habibi et al., Molecules, (2003) 8, 663-9, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
[0141] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (III) and (IV) are shown below:
Figure imgf000024_0001
[0142] For example, the compounds of formulae (III) and (IV) can have the following structures:
Figure imgf000024_0002
(III-l) (IV-I)
{0143) As shown in step (c) of Scheme 5, treatment of a compound of formula (IV) with an appropriate base (e.g., t-BuOK, NaOMe, NaOEt or LDA) can induce an intramolecular aldol reaction to form a compound of formula (V) wherein Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted lkyl; R2 can be hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following
Figure imgf000024_0003
alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; and R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Q-β alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl. [0144] As an example, the compounds of formulae (IV) and (V) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000025_0001
[0145] More specifically, compounds of formula (V) may adopt one of the following stereochemical structures:
Figure imgf000025_0002
(V-A) (V-B) (V-C)
[0146] Exemplary structures of compounds formulae (IV) and (V) are shown below:
Figure imgf000025_0003
(IV-I) (V-I)
[0147] More specifically, a compound of formula (V) may adopt one of the following stereochemical structures:
Figure imgf000026_0001
(V-IA) (V-IB) (V-IC)
[0148] A compound of formula (V) can be used to synthesize heterocyclic compounds such as Salinosporamide A and analogs thereof. One method can proceed through a compound of formula (X), which can then be transformed to Salinosporamide A and analogs thereof, as shown in the schemes herein. In an embodiment, a compound of formula (X) can be produced from a compound of formula (V) as shown in Scheme 6.
Figure imgf000026_0002
[0149] In step (d) of Scheme 6, the carbon-carbon double bond of the compound of formula (V) can be oxidatively cleaved and then cyclized to form a hemiacetal with the tertiary hydroxy group to form a compound of formula (VI), wherein Ri can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci-β alkyl; R.2 can be hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; and R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl. An exemplary method for preparing a compound of formula (VI) includes reacting a compound of formula (V) with a suitable oxidant or oxidant combination, such as OSO4 and NMO for several hours and then adding an additional oxidant (e.g.,NaIO4 or Pb(OAc)4) to the reaction mixture. The reaction can be quenched using suitable salt solutions.
[0150] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (V) and (VI) are shown below:
Figure imgf000027_0001
[0151] Examples of compounds of formulae (V) and (VI) are as follows:
Figure imgf000027_0002
(V-IA) (VI-I)
[0152] If desired, the hemiacetal of a compound of formula (VI) can be protected by forming an acetal using a protecting group moiety (e.g. benzyl, substituted benzyl, silyl, or methoxyl methyl) to form a compound of formula (VII), as shown in step (e) of Scheme 6. In some embodiments, Rj, R2, and R3 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VI); and PGi can be a protecting group moiety. Examples of suitable protecting group moieties are described herein.
[0153] As an example, the compounds of formulae (VI) and (VII) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000028_0001
[0154] Exemplary structures of compounds of formulae (VI) and (VII) are shown below:
Figure imgf000028_0002
(VI-I) (VIM)
[0155J As shown in step (f) of Scheme 6, the COOR2 group of a compound of formula (VII) can be reduced to an alcohol to form a compound of formula (VIII), wherein Rj, R3, and PGi can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII). For example, the COOR2 group can be reduced to an alcohol using a suitable reducing reagent (e.g., diisobutylaluminum hydride, lithium borohydride, lithium aluminum hydride, superhydride) and known techniques.
[0156] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (VII) and (VIII) are shown below:
Figure imgf000028_0003
[0157] For example, compounds of formulae (VII) and (VIII) can have the following structures:
Figure imgf000029_0001
(VII-I) (VIII-I)
[0158] In step (g) of Scheme 6, the C-5 alcohol of the compound of formula (VIII) can be oxidized using an appropriate oxidizing agent to form the compound of formula (IX), wherein Ri, R3, and PGi can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII). For example, an alcohol can be oxidized to an aldehyde using an oxidant such as Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP/NMO, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC.
[0159] Compounds of formulae (VIII) and (IX) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000029_0002
(VIII-I) (IX-I)
[0161] In another embodiment, the COOR2 group of a compound of formula (VII) can be reduced directly to an aldehyde to give a compound of formula (IX) in a single step. [0162J As shown in step (h) of Scheme 6, a compound of formula (X) can be synthesized by reacting an organσmetallic moiety containing at least one R4 with a compound of formula (IX), wherein Ri, R3, and PGi can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII); and R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Cj2 alkenyl, C2-C]2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkynyl, C3- C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinyl alkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl. In some embodiments, R4 can be selected from the group consisting of: substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfϊnylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl.
[0163 J A non-limiting list of suitable organometallic moieties include organomagnesium compounds, organolithium compounds, organotin compounds, organocuprates compounds, organozinc, and organopalladium compounds, metal carbonyls, metallocenes, carbine complexes, and organometalloids (e.g., organoboranes and organosi lanes). In some embodiments, the organometallic moiety can be selected from the group consisting Of R4-MgR7, R4-ZnR7, R4-Li, (R4)P-B(R7)S-P, and (R-Oq-Sn(R7),,. q; wherein R7 can selected from the group consisting of halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, isopinocampheyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, and carbonylalkoxy, wherein if more than one R7 is present, the R7 groups can optionally be bond together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl (e.g., 9-BBN), optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, optionally substituted heteroalkyl or optionally substituted heteroalkenyl ring; p can be an integer from 1 to 3; and q can be an integer from 1 to 4. In an embodiment, the organometallic moiety is (R4)p-B(R7)3-P. In certain embodiments, the organometallic moiety is (R4)P-B(R7)S-P, wherein R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl. In some embodiments, the organometallic moiety is (R<,)p- B(R7)3-P, wherein R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl, p is 1 , and the two R7 groups are taken together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl. In another embodiment, the organometallic moiety is R4-MgR7. In certain embodiments, the organometallic moiety is R4-MgR7, wherein R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl. In some embodiments, the organometallic moiety is R4- MgR7, wherein R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl and R7 is a halogen (e.g., chlorine).
[0164] As an example, the compounds of formulae (IX) and (X) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000031_0001
(X-A)
[0165] As another example, the compounds of formulae (IX) and (X) may have the following structures and stereochemistry.
Figure imgf000032_0001
(X-B)
[0166] Exemplary structures of compounds of formulae (IX) and (X) are shown below:
Figure imgf000032_0002
(IX-I) (X-IB)
[0167] Various synthetic routes can be used to transform a compound of formula (X) to Salinosporamide A and analogs thereof. In an embodiment, the synthesis can proceed through the intermediate compound of formula (XV). Exemplary synthetic routes are shown Schemes 7-1 to 7-5. Scheme 7-1
Figure imgf000033_0001
Scheme 7-2
Figure imgf000034_0001
[0168] As shown in step (i) of Scheme 7-1, the C-5 secondary hydroxy group of a compound of formula (X) can be protected with a suitable protecting group moiety to form a compound of formula (Xp), wherein R|, R3, R4 and PGj can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X); and PG2 can be a protecting group moiety. A non-limiting list of suitable protecting group moieties that can be used to protect the C-5 secondary hydroxy group of a compound of formula (X) include a substituted methyl ether (e.g. methoxymethyl), a substituted ethyl, a substituted benzylethyl, tetrahydropyranyl, a silyl ether (e.g. trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, or t-butyldiphenylsilyl), an ester (e.g. benzoate ester), or a carbonate (e.g. methoxymethyl carbonate). Alternatively, in some embodiments, the C-5 secondary hydroxy group of a compound of formula (X) can remain unprotected, as shown in Scheme 7-2.
[0169] Compounds of formulae (X) and (Xp) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000035_0001
(X-B) (Xp-B)
[0170] As examples, compounds of formulae (X) and (Xp) can have the following structures:
Figure imgf000035_0002
(X-IA) (Xp-IA)
Figure imgf000036_0001
(X-IB) (Xp-IB)
[0171] The aminal of a compound of formula (Xp) can be cleaved using a suitable acid (e.g. triflic acid, HCl, PTSA, PPTS, TFA, camphor sulfonic acid) to form a compound of formula (XIp), as shown in Scheme 7-1. In instances in which the C-5 secondary hydroxy is unprotected, the same or another acid can be used to form a compound of formula (XI) from a compound of formula (X). See Scheme 7-2. The substituents and protecting group moieties (Ri, R3, R4, PGi, and PG2 where applicable) for compounds of formula (XI) and (XIp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (Xp).
[0172] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (X), (Xp), (XI), and (XIp) are shown below:
Figure imgf000036_0002
Figure imgf000037_0001
(X-A) (XI-A)
[0173] As another example, the compounds of formulae (X), (Xp)5 (XI), and (XIp) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000037_0002
(X-B) (XI-B)
[0174] For example, compounds of formulae (X), (Xp), (XI) and (XIp) can have the following structures:
Figure imgf000038_0001
(Xp-IA) (XIp-IA)
Figure imgf000038_0002
Figure imgf000039_0001
(X-IB) (XI-IB)
[0175] As shown in Scheme 7-1 , step (k), the C-15 primary alcohol group of a compound of formula (XIp) can be transformed to R5 to form a compound of formula (XIIp). Similarly when the C-5 secondary hydroxy group is unprotected, the C- 15 primary alcohol group of a compound of formula (XI) can be transformed to R5 to form a compound of formula (XII). See Scheme 7-2. R3, R4, PGi, (and PG2, where applicable) of the compounds of formulae (XII) and (XIIp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (Xp); and R5 can be selected from the group consisting of —
Figure imgf000039_0002
-C(=O)Z wherein each R6 can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p- nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl; and Z can be a halogen. For example, the primary alcohol group can be converted to a carboxylic acid using appropriate oxidation conditions such as Jones oxidation. Alternatively, the carboxylic acid group can be prepared from the primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XI) or (XIp) through an aldehyde. The primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XI) or (XIp) can first be converted to aldehyde using appropriate oxidant such as Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC and then the resulting aldehyde can be oxidized further to carboxylic acid using appropriate oxidants such as a combination of sodium chlorite/sodium phosphate dibasic/2-methyl-2-butene. If desired, the carboxylic acid can then be further converted to an ester, a thioester, acid halides (e.g., acid chloride) or an anhydride using an appropriate alcohol, thiol (e.g., thiophenol, cystine), thionyl or oxalyl chlorides, carboxylic acid (e.g., acetic acid, benzoic acid), and/or anhydride (e.g., acetic anhydride). [0176] As an example, the compounds of formulae (XI), (XIp), (XII) and (XIIp) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000040_0001
(XIp-A) (XIIp-A)
Figure imgf000040_0002
(XI-A) (XII-A)
[0177] Other exemplary structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XI), (XIp)3 (XH) and (XIIp) include following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000040_0003
Figure imgf000041_0001
G1
(XI-B) (XII-B)
[0178] Exemplary structures of compounds of formulae (XI), (XIp), (XH)3 and (XIIp) are as follows:
Figure imgf000041_0002
(XIp-IA) (XIIp-IA)
Figure imgf000041_0003
Figure imgf000042_0001
(XIp-IB) CXIIp-IB)
Figure imgf000042_0002
(XI-IB) (XII-IB)
[0179] In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XII) can have the structure shown in Scheme 7-2, with the proviso that if a compound of formula (XII) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XII-IA)3 then Rs cannot be -C(=O)OR6, wherein R6 is t-butyl.
[0180] A compound of formula (XIV) can be synthesized by removing any protecting group moieties on the compound of formula (XII) and/or (XIIp) to form a compound of formula (XIII) and then cleaving the hemiacetal of the compound of formula (XIII). In some embodiments, R3, R4, and Rs of the compounds of formulae (XIII) and (XIV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XIIp). One method for reductively cleaving the hemiacetal can be using a suitable reducing reagent such as sodium borohydride. In one embodiment, the formation of a compound of formula (XIV) from a compound of formula (XII) or (XIIp) can be accomplished in a single step. In another embodiment, the protecting group moiety PGj on the compound of formula (XII) can be initially removed to form a compound of formula (XIII) and then the resulting hemiacetal can be reductively cleaved to form a compound of formula (XIV). In another embodiment, the protecting group moieties PG] and PG2 on the compound of formula (XIIp) can be removed simultaneously or sequentially to form a compound of formula (XIII) and then the resulting hemiacetal can be reductively cleaved to form a compound of formula (XIV). If the protecting group moieties on the compound of formula (XIIp) are removed sequentially, they can be removed in any order to form a compound of formula (XIII).
[0181] Compounds of formulae (XII), (XIIp), (XIII), and (XIV) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000043_0001
(XII-A) (XIIp-A) (XIII-A) (XIV-
A)
Figure imgf000043_0002
(XII-B) (XIIp-B) (XIII-B) (XIV-
B)
[0182] Exemplary structures of compounds of formulae (XII), (XIIp), (XIII), and (XIV) are shown below:
Figure imgf000044_0001
(XII-IA) (XIIp-IA) (XIII-IA) (XIV-
IA)
Figure imgf000044_0002
IB)
[0183] In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XIV) can be synthesized by removing any protecting group moieties on the compound of formula (XII) and/or (XIIp) and reductively cleaving the resulting hemiacetal of the compound of formula (XIII) with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XII) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compounds of formula (XII-IA), then R5 cannot be — C(=O)OR6, wherein Rg is t-butyl. In other embodiments, a compound of formula (XIV) x can be synthesized by removing any protecting group moieties on the compound of formula (XII) and/or (XIIp) and reductively cleaving the resulting hemiacetal of the compound of formula (XIII) with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XIII) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compounds of formula (XIII-IA)3 then R5 cannot be -C(=O)OR6, wherein R6 is t-butyl.
[0184] In one embodiment, a compound of formula (XIII) can have the structure and stereochemistry of a compound of formula (XIII-IA), with the proviso that Rs cannot be -C(=O)OR6, wherein R6 is t-butyl. In an embodiment, a compound of formula (XIV) can have structure shown herein, with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XIV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XIV- IA), then R5 cannot be — C(=O)OR6, wherein R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or t-butyl.
[01851 Finally, in step (m) of Schemes 7-1 and 7-2, a compound of formula (XV) can be formed by treating a compound of formula (XIV) with an appropriate base (e.g., BOPCl/pyridine, tri ethyl amine) to induce a lactonization reaction and form the 4- membered heterocyclic ring, wherein R3, R4, and R5 can be same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XII) or (XIIp). In an embodiment, if R$ is an ester, it can first be transformed to a carboxylic acid, an activated acid (e.g., acid halide), or an activated ester (e.g., p-nitrophenyl ester, pentafluorophenyl ester, pentafluoroethyl ester, trifluoroethyl ester, trichloroethyl ester, a thioester, etc.) before being treated with an appropriate reagent to induce the lactonization reaction. For example, when R5 is carboxylic acid, it can be treated with an appropriate base to affect the lactonization reaction. In some embodiments, if Rs is an amide, it can first be transformed to a carboxylic acid, an activated acid, or an activated ester such as those described herein before being treated with an appropriate base to induce the lactonization reaction.
[0186] As an example, the compounds of formulae (XIV) and (XV) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000045_0001
[0187] In another example, the compounds of formulae (XIV) and (XV) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000046_0001
(XIV-B) (XV-B)
[0188] Exemplary structures of compounds of formulae (XIV) and (XV) are as follows:
Figure imgf000046_0002
[0189] In an embodiment, R5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IA) can be a carboxylic acid. In some embodiments, R5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IA) can be an activated acid (e.g., acid chloride). In certain embodiments, R5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IA) can be an activated ester such as p-nitrophenyl ester, pentafluorophenyl ester, pentafluoroethyl ester, trifluoroethyl ester, trichloroethyl ester, thioester, etc. In an embodiment, R5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IB) can be a carboxylic acid. In some embodiments, R5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IB) can be an activated acid (e.g., acid chloride). In certain embodiments, R5 of the compound of formula (XIV-IB) can be an activated ester such as p-nitrophenyl ester, pentafluorophenyl ester, pentafluoroethyl ester, trifluoroethyl ester, trichloroethyl ester, thioester, etc.
[0190] In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XV) can be synthesized by performing a lactonization reaction on a compound of formula (XIV) with the proviso that if the compounds of formulae (XIV) and (XV) have the same structures and stereochemistry as the compounds of formulae (XIV-IA) and (XV-IA), then R5 cannot be -C(=O)OR^, wherein R6 is hydrogen. In other embodiments, the lactonization reaction includes the further proviso that R6 cannot be methyl or t-butyl when the compounds of formulae (XIV) and (XV) have the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XIV-IA) and (XV-IA). In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XV) can be synthesized by performing a lactonization reaction on a compound of formula (XIV) and/or (XIV-A) with the proviso that if R5 is -C(=O)OR6, wherein R6 is hydrogen, methyl or t-butyl then R4 cannot be isopropyl. In an embodiment, a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R3 is methyl then R4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl. In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if R3 is methyl then R4 cannot be isopropyl, cyclohexyl, or phenyl. In one embodiment, a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R3 is methyl then R4 cannot be isopropyl.
[0191] A compound of formula (XV) can also be synthesized from a compound of formula (X) as shown in Scheme 7-3. By . modifying the protection/deprotection sequence, a compound of formula (XV) can also be obtained from a compound of formula (X) as shown in Schemes 7-4 and 7-5. Scheme 7-3
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000048_0002
Scheme 7-4
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000049_0002
Scheme 7-5
Figure imgf000050_0001
* PG3 can be the same or different in the two compounds of formula XXVI shown above
[0192] A compound of formula (XXIII) can be synthesized by removing the protecting group moiety on the compound of formula (X) and reductively opening the hemiacetal. The protecting group moiety can be removed using known methods and the hemiacetal can be reductively opened using a reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride). In some embodiments, the substituents (and protecting group moiety where applicable) (Ri, R3, R4, and PGi) for compound of formulae (X) and (XXIII) can be selected from the following: Ri can be hydrogen or an unsubstituted or substituted Ci.6 alkyl; R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl; R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-C12 alkyl, C2-C)2 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-Cj2 cycloalkenyl, C3-Cj2 cycloalkynyl, C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl,
(heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthϊoalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl..
[0193] Compounds of formulae (X) and (XXIII) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000051_0001
(X-A) (XXIII-A)
Figure imgf000052_0001
(X-B) (XXIII -B)
[0194] As examples, compounds of formulae (X) and (XXIII) can have the following structures:
Figure imgf000052_0002
(X-IA) (XXIII-IA)
Figure imgf000052_0003
(X-IB) (XXIII-IB)
[0195] If desired, the C- 13 primary and C-5 secondary hydroxy groups of a compound of formula (XXIII) can be protected using suitable protecting group moieties as described herein to form a compound of formula (XXIVp), as shown in Scheme 7-3. Alternatively, only the C- 13 primary hydroxy group of a compound of formula (XXIII) can be protected to form a compound of formula (XXIV), as shown in Scheme 7-4 and 7- 5. In some embodiments, Ri, R3, and R4 of the compound of formula (XXIV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X) and PG3 can be a protecting group moiety. In certain embodiments, PG3 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyls (e.g., benzoyl); substituted or unsubstituted alkyl carbonyl (e.g. acetyl); substituted methyl ether (e.g. methoxymethyl); substituted ethyl ether; substituted or substituted benzyl ether (e.g. benzyl, 4- methoxybenzyl); tetrahydropyranyl ether; silyl ethers (e.g., trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, or t-butyldiphenylsilyl); carbonates (e.g. methoxymethylcarbonate); and sulfonates (e.g. mesylate, tosylate. In an embodiment, R|, R3 and R4 of the compound of formula (XXIVp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X), and PG2 and PG3 can be protecting group moieties. In some embodiments, PG3 cannot be an alkyl carbonyl (e.g., -C(=O)CH2CH3). In other embodiments, PG3 cannot be a sulfonate (e.g., methylate).
[0196] As an example, the compounds of formulae (XXIII), (XXIV), and (XXIVp) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000053_0001
(XXIVp-A)
Figure imgf000053_0002
Figure imgf000053_0003
[0197] Other examples of the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXIII), (XXIV), and (XXIVp) include the following:
Figure imgf000054_0001
(XXIII-IA) (XXIV-IA) (XXIVp-IA)
Figure imgf000054_0002
(XXIII-IB) (XXIV-IB) (XXIVp-IB)
[0198] Similar to step Q) of Schemes 7-1 and 7-2, the aminal of a compound of formula (XXIV) can be cleaved using a suitable acid as described herein to form a compound of formula (XXV). In the case where the C-5 secondary hydroxy has been protected, the aminal of a compound of formula (XXIVp) can also be cleaved using a suitable acid to form a compound of formula (XXVp). In some embodiments, R3, and R4 of the compound of formula (XXV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X), and PG3 can be a protecting group moiety. In some embodiments, R3 and R4, and PG2 for compound of formula (XXVp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X), and PG2 and PG3 can be protecting group moieties.
[0199] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXIV) and (XXV) are shown below:
Figure imgf000055_0001
(XXIV-B) (XXV-B)
[0200] Additional examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXIVp), and (XXVp) can be as follows:
Figure imgf000055_0002
(XXIVp-A) (XXVp-A)
Figure imgf000056_0001
(XXIVp-B) (XXVp-B)
[0201] Compounds of formulae (XXIV), (XXIVp), (XXV), and (XXVp) may also have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000056_0002
(XXIV-IA) (XXV-IA)
Figure imgf000056_0003
(XXIV-IB) (XXV-IB)
Figure imgf000057_0001
(XXIVp-IA) (XXVp-IA)
Figure imgf000057_0002
(XXIVp- 1 B) (XXVp- 1 B)
[0202] As shown in Scheme 7-5, the aminal of the compound of formula
(XXIV) can first be cleaved using one of methods described herein to form a compound of formula (XXV). The C-5 secondary hydroxy group of the compound of formula
(XXV) can then be protected with an appropriate protecting group moiety to form a compound of formula (XXVp). In some embodiments, R3, R4, PG2, and PG3 of the compounds of formulae (XXV) and (XXVp) can be the same as described in the preceding paragraphs.
[0203] Exemplary structures of compounds of formulae (XXV) and (XXVp) are as follows:
Figure imgf000058_0001
(XXV-B) (XXVp-B)
[0204] As an example, the compounds of formulae (XXV) and (XXVp) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000058_0002
(XXV-IA) (XXVp-IA)
Figure imgf000059_0001
(XXV-IB) CXXVp-IB)
[0205] In an embodiment, the primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XXV) and/or (XXVp) can be transformed to R5 to form a compound of formula (XXVI) and/or (XXVIp), respectively (see Schemes 7-3 and 7-4, respectively).
[0206] In some embodiments, the compound of formula (XXVp) can be transformed directly to a compound of formula (XXVI) as shown in Scheme 7-5. In an embodiment, the protecting group moiety, PG2, on the compound of formula (XXVp) can be removed simultaneously with the transformation of the C- 15 primary alcohol to R5 group to form a compound of formula (XXVI). Alternatively, in an embodiment, PG2 can be removed before or after the transformation of the primary alcohol.
[0207] The transformation of the C- 15 primary alcohol group to an R5 group can be achieved using the same or a similar method to the one described in step (k) of Schemes 7-1 and/or 7-2. In some embodiments, R3, R4, and Rs of the compounds of formulae (XXVI) and (XXVIp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formulae (XII) or (XIIp) of Schemes 7-1 and/or 7-2, and PG2 and PG3 can be a protecting group moieties.
[0208] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXV), (XXVp), (XXVI), and (XXVIp) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000060_0001
(XXVp-A) (XXVIp-A)
Figure imgf000061_0001
(XXVp-B) (XXVIp-B)
Figure imgf000061_0002
(XXVp-B) (XXVI-B)
[0209] Other examples of the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXV), (XXVp), (XXVI), and (XXVIp) are shown below:
Figure imgf000062_0001
(XXV-IA) (XXVI-IA)
Figure imgf000062_0002
(XXV-IB) (XXVI-IB)
Figure imgf000062_0003
(XXVp-IA) (XXVIp-IA)
Figure imgf000063_0001
(XXVp-IB) (XXVIp-IB)
Figure imgf000063_0002
(XXVp-IA) (XXVI-IA)
Figure imgf000063_0003
(XXVp-IB) (XXVI-IB)
[0210] In some embodiments, the protecting group PG3 on compounds of formulae (XXVI) and (XXVIp) can be removed to form a compound of formulae (XXVII) and (XXVIIp), respectively. See Scheme 7-5. The C- 13 primary hydroxy of the compounds of formulae (XXVII) and (XXVIIp) can then be reprotected with the same or different protecting group. For example, in one embodiment, a benzoyl group protecting the C- 13 hydroxy on a compound of formula (XXVI) or (XXVIp) can be removed and replaced with a TBS or TES protecting group. Suitable methods for removing protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art. For example, a benzoyl protecting group (PG3 = Bz) can be removed using a suitable base such as K2CO3 to form a compound of formula (XXVII) or (XXVIIp).
[0211] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXVI)5 (XXVIp), (XXVII) and (XXVIIp) are shown below:
Figure imgf000064_0001
(XXVI-A) (XXVII-A)
(XXVI-A)
Figure imgf000064_0002
(XXVI-B) (XXVII-B)
(XXVI-B)
Figure imgf000065_0001
(XXVIp-A) (XXVIIp-A)
(XXVIp-A)
Figure imgf000065_0002
(XXVIp-B) (XXVIIp-B)
(XXVIp-B)
(0212] Additional examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXVI), (XXVIp), (XXVII) and (XXVIIp) can be as follows:
Figure imgf000065_0003
IA)
(XXVI-IB) (XXVII-IB) (XXVI-
Figure imgf000066_0002
Figure imgf000066_0003
(XXVIp-IA) (XXVIp-
Figure imgf000066_0005
Figure imgf000066_0004
Figure imgf000066_0006
(XXVIp-IB) (XXVIIp-IB) (XXVIp-IB)
[0213] Further examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXVI), (XXVIp)3 (XXVII) and (XXVIIp) can be as follows:
Figure imgf000067_0001
(XXVI-IA-Bz) (XXVII-IA) (XXVI-IA-TES) (XXVI-IA-
TBS)
Figure imgf000067_0002
(XXVI- IB-Bz) (XXVII-IB) (XXVI- 1 B-TES) (XXVI-
TBS)
Figure imgf000067_0003
(XXVIp- IA-Bz) (XXVIIp-IA) (XXVIp- 1 A-TES) (XXVIp- 1 A- TBS)
Figure imgf000068_0001
(XXVIp- IB-Bz) (XXVIIp-IB) (XXVIp-IB-TES) (XXVIp- IB-
TBS)
[0214] Using an appropriate base, a compound of formula (XXVIII) and/or (XXVIIIp) can be synthesized via a lactonization reaction from a compound of formula (XXVI) and (XXVIp), respectively. See Schemes 7-3, 7-4 and 7-5. In some embodiments, R3, R4, R5 (and PG2. where relevant) for compounds of formulae (XXVIII) and (XXVIIIp) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formulae (XXVI) and (XXVIp)5 and PG3 can be a protecting group moiety. In some embodiment, R5 of the compound of formula (XXVI) or (XXVIp) can be a carboxylic acid. In an embodiment, R5 of the compound of formula (XXVI) or (XXVIp) can be an activated acid (e.g., acid chloride). In certain embodiments, R5 of the compound of formula (XXVI) or (XXVIp) can be an activated ester such as p-nitrophenyl ester, pentafluorophenyl ester, pentafluoroethyl ester, trifluoroethyl ester, trichloroethyl ester, thioester, etc.
[0215] In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XXVIII) can be synthesized by performing a lactonization reaction on a compound of formula (XXVI) with the proviso that if the compounds of formulae (XXVIH) and (XXVI) have the same structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXVIII-IA) and (XXVI- IA), then Rs cannot be -C(=O)OR6, wherein R6 is hydrogen. In other embodiments, the lactonization reaction includes the further the proviso that R5 cannot be methyl or t-butyl when the compounds of formulae (XXVIII) and (XXVI) have the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXVIII-IA) and (XXVI-IA). In an embodiment, the compound of formula (XXVIII) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl and R3 is methyl, then PG3 cannot be — Ct=O)CHbCH3 and/or mesylate. In an embodiment, if the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XXVIII-A) and if R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl and R3 is methyl, then PG3 cannot be -Ct=O)CH2CH3 and/or mesylate. [0216] As an example, compounds of formulae (XXVI) and (XXVIII) can have the structures and stereochemistry shown below:
Figure imgf000070_0001
(XXVI-B) (XXVIII-B)
[0217] Other exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXVIp) and (XXVIIIp) are as follows:
Figure imgf000070_0002
(XXVIp-A) (XXVIIIp-A)
Figure imgf000071_0001
(XXVIp-B) (XXVIIIp-B)
[0218] Additional examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXVI), (XXVIp)5 (XXVIII), and (XXVHIp) are shown below:
Figure imgf000071_0002
(XXVI-IA) (XXVIII-IA)
Figure imgf000071_0003
(XXVI-IB) (XXVIII-IB)
Figure imgf000072_0001
(XXVIp-IA) (XXVIIIp-IA)
Figure imgf000072_0002
(XXVIp-IB) (XXVIIIp-IB)
[0219] In the final step shown in Scheme 7-3, 7-4 and 7-5, any protecting group moieties can be removed from a compound of formula (XXVIII) and/or (XXVIIIp) to form a compound of formula (XV), respectively. In some embodiments, R3 and R4 (and PG2, where relevant) of the compounds (XXVIII), (XXVIIIp) and (XV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formulae (XXVI) or (XXVIp), and PG3 can be a protecting group moiety. In another embodiment, the protecting groups PG2 and PG3 can be removed from a compound of formula (XXVIIIp) in a stepwise fashion to form a compound of formula (XV); the protecting groups can be removed in any order. In yet another embodiment, the protecting groups PG2 and PG3 are simultaneously removed from a compound of formula (XXVIIIp) to form a compound of formula (XV). In an embodiment, a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R3 is methyl then R4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl. [0220] Compounds of formulae (XXVIII), (XXVIIIp) and (XV) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000073_0001
(XXVIII-B) (XXVIIIp-B) (XV-B)
[0221] In addition, compounds of formula (XXVIII), (XXVIIIp) and (XV) can have the structures and stereochemistry shown below:
Figure imgf000073_0002
(XXVIII- IA) (XXVIIIp-IA)
Figure imgf000073_0003
Figure imgf000074_0001
(XXVIII-IB) (XXVIIIp-IB) (XV-I B)
[0222] Using an appropriate base, a compound of formula (XV) can also be synthesized via a lactonization reaction from a compound of formula (XXVII), as shown in Scheme 7-5, or lactonization reaction from a compound of formula (XXVIIp) followed by deprotection. In some embodiments, R3, ILt, R5, (and PG2, where relevant) for the compounds of formulae (XXVII), (XXVIIp), and (XV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formulae XVII or (XVIIp).
[0223] As an example, compounds of formulae (XXVII), (XXVIIp), (XVp) and (XV) can have the structures and stereochemistry shown below:
Figure imgf000074_0002
(XXVII-A) (XV-A)
Figure imgf000075_0001
(XXVIIp-B) (XVp-B) (XV-B)
[0224] In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XV) can be synthesized by performing a lactonization reaction on a compound of formula (XXVII) with the proviso that if the compounds of formulae (XXVII) and (XV) have the same structures and stereochemistry as the compounds of formulae (XXVII -IA) and (XV-IA)5 then R5 cannot be -C(=O)OR6, wherein Re is hydrogen. In other embodiments, the lactonization reaction includes the further proviso that Rg cannot be methyl or t-butyl when the compounds of formulae (XXVII) and (XV) have the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXVII -IA) and (XV-IA). In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XV) can be synthesized by performing a lactonization reaction on a compound of formula (XXVII) and/or (XXVII-A) with the proviso that if R5 is -C(=O)OR<$5 wherein R6 is hydrogen, methyl or t-butyl then R4 cannot be isopropyl. In an embodiment, a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R3 is methyl then R4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl. In an embodiment, a compound of formula (XV) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XV) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XV-A) and R3 is methyl then R4 cannot be isopropyl. In an embodiment, a compound of formula (XVp) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if R3 is methyl and R4 is isopropyl then PG2 cannot be DMIPS or TB S. In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XVp) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XVp) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XVp-A) and R3 is methyl and R4 is isopropyl then PG2 cannot be DMIPS or TBS.
[0225] In an embodiment, a compound of formula (XXVII) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XXVII-A), R3 is methyl, and R5 is — C(=O)ORό, wherein R6 is methyl, H or t-butyl, then R4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl. In one embodiment, a compound of formula (XXVIIp) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if the compound of formula (XXVIIp) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XXVIIp-A); R3 is methyl; R5 is - C(=O)ORό, wherein R6 is hydrogen or methyl; and PG2 is TBS or DMIPS then R4 cannot be isopropyl.
[0226] Other exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXVII), (XXVlIp)5 (XVp) and (XV) are as follows:
Figure imgf000077_0001
(XXVII-IA) (XV-IA)
Figure imgf000077_0002
(XXVII-IB) (XV-IB)
Figure imgf000077_0003
Figure imgf000078_0001
IB)
[0227] As shown in Scheme 7-6, a compound of formula (XV) can further be transformed by replacing the C- 13 primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV) to form a compound of formula (XVI), wherein R3 and R4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X) and X can be a halogen (e.g., F, Cl, Br, and I). If desired or necessary, R4, in some embodiments, can be protected and/or deprotected one or several times in any of the synthetic steps described herein.
Scheme 7-6
Figure imgf000078_0002
(XV) (XVI)
[0228] Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XV) and (XVI) are shown below:
Figure imgf000079_0001
(XV-B) (XVI-B)
[0229] Further examples of the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formula (XV) and (XVI) are shown below:
Figure imgf000079_0002
(XV-IB) (XVI-IB)
[0230] In one embodiment, Salinosporamide A can be synthesized by chlorinating a compound of formula (XV), wherein R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl and R3 is methyl.
Figure imgf000080_0001
(XV-IA) (XVI-IA)
[0231J In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XVI) can be prepared by substituting the C- 13 primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV), with the proviso that the compounds of formula (XV) and (XVI) cannot be the compounds of formula (XV-IA) and (XVI-IA). In certain embodiments, if the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XVI-A), then R4 cannot be isopropyl or 2-cyclohexenyl when R3 is methyl and X is chlorine.
[0232] In an embodiment, the C- 13 primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV) can be converted to a leaving group, as shown in Scheme 7-7. A non- limiting list of suitable leaving groups (LG) includes sulfonate leaving groups (e.g. tosylate, (OTs), mesylate (OMs), triflate (OTf), tripsylate (OTps), and mesitylate (OMst)). In an embodiment, R3 and R4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (X). If desired, the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be protected or oxidized before converting the C-13 secondary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV). After the leaving group has been added, the C-5 center can be deprotected and/or reduced to a hydroxy group.
Scheme 7-7
Figure imgf000081_0001
[0233] Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XV) and (XXXX) with a leaving group attached to the C-13 oxygen are shown below:
Figure imgf000081_0002
Figure imgf000082_0001
(XV-IB) (XXXX-IB)
[0234] The leaving group of compounds of formula (XXXX) can be displaced with a nucleophile (Nu) using methods known to those skilled in the art to form a compound of formula (XXXXI). See Scheme 7-8. In an embodiment, R3 and R4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXXX). Suitable nucleophiles include but are not limited to R9S", CN", Rc)O", halide anion, NRg3R^", N3 ", - CO2Rg, R9OH, and R9SH wherein R9> R9a and R9b can each be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-Ci2 alkyl, C2-Cn alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkenyl, C37C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, and alkyl acyl, wherein Rga and R?b can be taken together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl. Scheme 7-8
Figure imgf000083_0001
(XXXX) (XXXXI)
[0235] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXXX) and (XXXXI) include:
Figure imgf000083_0002
(XXXX-A) (XXXXI-A)
Figure imgf000083_0003
(XXXX-B) (XXXXI-B)
Figure imgf000084_0001
(XXXX-IA) (XXXXI-IA)
Figure imgf000084_0002
(XXXX-IB) (XXXXI-IB)
[0236] In some embodiments, the C- 13 primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV) can be oxidized. For example, in one embodiment, the C- 13 primary hydroxy group can be oxidized to an aldehyde to form a compound of formula (XXX). See Scheme 7-9. In an embodiment, R3 and R4 of a compound of formula (XXX) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVII). If desired, the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be protected or remained unprotected during the oxidation. Scheme 7-9
Figure imgf000085_0001
[0237] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XV) and (XXX) are shown below:
Figure imgf000085_0002
[0238] Additional examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XV) and (XXX) include the following:
Figure imgf000086_0001
Scheme 7-10
Figure imgf000087_0001
(XXXIV)
[0239J A compound of formula (XXX) can further be transformed as shown in step (n) of Scheme 7-10. In one embodiment, a Wirtig reaction can be used to convert a compound of formula (XXX) to compounds of formulae (XXXI), wherein R3 and R4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXX), R' can be hydrogen, halogen, -C(O)R", -C(=O)OR", -C(O)N(R")* -C(=O)SR", -CN, -(CH2)nOH, and -(CH2)nX; R" can be a hydrogen or a substituted or unsubstituted variant of the following: alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, and arylalkoxy, and when more than one R" is present, they may be the same or different; X can be a halogen; and n can be O, 1, 2, 3, or 4. Appropriate conditions and reagents are known to those skilled in the art and include Wittig reagents such as triphenyl phosphonium ylides). In an embodiment, n can be O. In another embodiment, n can be 1. In still another embodiment, n can be 2. In yet still another embodiment, n can be 3. In an embodiment, n can be 4. [0240] Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXX), and (XXXI) are shown below:
Figure imgf000088_0001
(XXX-B) (XXXI-B)
Figure imgf000088_0002
(XXX-IA) (XXXI-IA)
Figure imgf000089_0001
(XXX-IA) (XXXI-IB)
[0241] Selective hydrogenation of the side chain double bond of compound of formula (XXXI) can form a compound of formula (XXXIII), as shown in step (o) of Scheme 7-10. In an embodiment, R3, R4 and R' of a compound of formula (XXXIII) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXXI). In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XXXIII) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that if R3 is methyl and R' is hydrogen or chlorine then R4 cannot be isopropyl, cyclohexyl, or phenyl.
[0242] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXXI), and (XXXIII) are shown below:
Figure imgf000089_0002
(XXXI-A) (XXXIII-A)
Figure imgf000090_0001
(XXXI-B) (XXXIII-B)
[0243] In certain embodiments, compounds of formulae (XXXI) and (XXXIII) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000090_0002
(XXXI-IA) (XXXIII- IA)
Figure imgf000090_0003
(XXXI-IB) (XXXIII-IB)
[0244] In another embodiment, nonselective reduction of the compound of formula (XXXl-A) or (XXXl-B) can be used to obtain the compounds of formulae (XXXII), respectively. In some embodiments, a compound of formula (XXXII) can have the structure shown herein with the proviso that R' cannot be hydrogen or chlorine.
Figure imgf000091_0001
(XXXII)
Figure imgf000091_0002
Figure imgf000091_0004
Figure imgf000091_0003
(XXXl-B) (XXXII-IB)
[0245] A compound of formula (XXX) can also be used to form a compound of formula (XXXIV) using an organometallic reagent as shown in step (p) of Scheme 7- 10. Suitable organometallic reagents include but are not limited to organolithium compounds, organotin compounds, organocuprates compounds, organozinc, and organopalladium compounds, metal carbonyls, metallocenes, carbine complexes, and organometalloids (e.g., organoboranes and organosilanes). In some embodiments, the organometallic moiety can be selected from the group consisting of Rg-MgR7, Rg-ZnR7, Rg-Li, (R8)p-B(R7)3-p, and (R8)q-Sn(R7)4-q; wherein R7 can selected from the group consisting of halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, isopinocampheyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, and carbonylalkoxy, wherein if more than one R7 is present, the R7 groups can optionally be bond together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl (e.g., 9-BBN), optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, optionally substituted heteroalkyl or optionally substituted heteroalkenyl ring; p can be an integer from 1 to 3; and q can be an integer from 1 to 4 and Re can selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl. In an embodiment, the organometallic moiety is (R8)P-B(R7)3-P. In certain embodiments, the organometallic moiety is (Rg)p-B(R7)3-P, wherein Rg is -(CH2)aOH. In some embodiments, the organometallic moiety is (Rg)p-B(R7)3-P, wherein Rg is — (CH2)aOH, p is 1, and the two R7 groups are taken together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl. In another embodiment, the organometallic moiety is Rg-MgR7. In certain embodiments, the organometallic moiety is Rg-MgR7, wherein Rg is -(CH2)aOH. In some embodiments, the organometallic moiety is Rg-MgR7, wherein Rg is -(CHs)3OH and R7 is a halogen (e.g., chlorine). In some embodiments, R3 and R4 of a compound of formula (XXXIV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXVI). In an embodiment, a can be 1. In another embodiment, a can be 2. In still another embodiment, a can be 3. In yet still another embodiment, a can be 4. In an embodiment, a can be 5. In an embodiment, a can be 6. In still another embodiment, In an embodiment, a can be > 7
[0246] Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXX) and (XXXIV) are shown below:
Figure imgf000093_0001
(XXX-A) (XXXIV-A)
Figure imgf000093_0002
(XXXIV-B)
Figure imgf000093_0003
Figure imgf000093_0004
(XXX-IA) (XXXIV-IA)
Figure imgf000094_0001
(XXX-IB) (XXXIV-IB)
[0247] In certain embodiments, R8 can be -(CH2)aOH, wherein a can be selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 7. Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXXIV-IB) when Rs is -(CH2)aOH is shown below:
Figure imgf000094_0002
(XXX) (XXXXII)
Figure imgf000094_0003
(XXX-A) (XXXXII-A)
Figure imgf000095_0001
(XXX-B) (XXXXII-B)
Figure imgf000095_0002
(XXX-IA) (XXXXII-IA)
Figure imgf000095_0003
(XXX-IB) (XXXXII-IB)
[0248] When R8 is -<CH2)aOH, a compound of formula (XXXIV) can be halogenated to form a compound of formula (XXXV), wherein X is a halogen (e.g., F3 Cl, Br, and I), as shown in Scheme 7-11.. In some embodiments, R3 and R4 of a compound of formula (XXXV) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXVI). In an embodiment, a can be 1. In another embodiment, a can be 2. In still another embodiment, a can be 3. In yet still another embodiment, a can be 4. In an embodiment, a can be 5. In another embodiment, a can be 6. In still another embodiment, a can be 6. In yet still another embodiment, a can be > 7.
Scheme 7-11
Figure imgf000096_0001
(XXXXII) (XXXV)
[0249] Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (XXXXII) and (XXXV) are shown below:
Figure imgf000096_0002
(XXXXII-A) (XXXV-A)
Figure imgf000097_0001
(XXXXII-B) (XXXV-B)
Figure imgf000097_0002
(XXXXII-IA)
Figure imgf000097_0004
Figure imgf000097_0003
(XXXXII-IB) (XXXV-IB)
[0250] The stereochemistry of the secondary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be inverted (e.g., by a Mitsunobu transformation) to form a compound of formula (XVI-A).
Figure imgf000098_0001
(XVI-B) (XVI-A)
[0251] In one embodiment, Salinosporamide A can be synthesized from a compound with the structure and stereochemistry of formula (XVI-IB) as shown below:
Figure imgf000098_0002
(XVI-IB) (XVI-IA)
[0252] Alternatively, the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted via a multistep process, for example, by oxidizing the secondary hydroxy to a ketone and then reducing the ketone to a secondary hydroxy of opposite stereochemistry. In one method, the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be oxidized with a suitable oxidizing agent (e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP/NMO, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC5 or PDC) to form the compound of formula (XXII). In some embodiments of the compound of formula (XXII), R4 cannot be substituted or unsubstituted cyclohexenyl, unsubstituted cyclohexa-l,3-dienyl, TMSO substituted cyclohexa-l,3-dienyl, unsubstituted phenyl, TMSO substituted phenyl, when R3 is methyl and X is halogen. In an embodiment, if the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure and stereochemistry of the compound of formula (XXII-A), then R4 cannot be substituted or unsubstituted cyclohexenyl, unsubstituted cyclohexa-l,3-dienyl, TMSO substituted cyclohexa-1,3- dienyl, unsubstituted phenyl, TMSO substituted phenyl, when R3 is methyl and X is halogen. The compound of formula (XXII) can then be reduced to a compound of formula (XVI-A) using a suitable chemical reagent such as sodium borohydride. In some embodiments, the reduction can be accomplished via selective enzymatic transformation. In certain embodiments, the reducing enzyme is a ketoreductase such as KRED-EXP- ClA and/or KRED-EXP-BIY.
Figure imgf000099_0001
(XVI-B) (XXII)
(XVI-A)
[0253] In another embodiment, Salinosporamide A can be synthesized from a compound with the structure and stereochemistry of formula (XVI-IB) as follows:
Figure imgf000099_0002
(XVI-IB) (XXII-I) (XVI-
IA)
[0254] Moreover, the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted at any time after the addition of the R4 group to the compound of formula (X). For example, the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted in the compounds of formulae (X), (Xp), (XI)3 (XIp), (XII), (XIIp)5 (XIII), (XIV)5 (XV), (XXIII), (XXIV)5 (XXIVp), (XXV), (XXVp), (XXVI), (XXVIp), (XXII), (XXVIII), and (XXVIIIp). In an embodiment, the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted in a one step process as described herein (e.g., by a Mitsunobu transformation). The inversion can also take place in multistep process. In an embodiment, the C-5 secondary hydroxy group can be oxidized using an appropriate oxidizing agent (e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP/NMO, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC) to a keto group and then reduced to a hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent such as sodium borohydride. In another embodiment, the keto group can be reduced via selective enzymatic transformation. In certain embodiments, the reducing enzyme is a ketoreductase such as KRED-EXP-ClA and/or KRED-EXP-BlY.
[02551 An alternative method for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs from the compound of formula (V) can proceed through a compound of formula (XVII). Scheme 8-1 shows a method of synthesizing a compound of formula (XVII) from a compound of formula (V). Scheme 8-2 shows a method of synthesizing a compound of formula (XVII) from a compound of formula (X). Schemes 9-1 and 9-2 show methods of synthesizing Salinosporamide A and its analogs from a compound of formula (XVII).
Figure imgf000101_0001
[0256] For some of the embodiments described herein, steps (d) and (e) of Scheme 8-1 can be the same as described above with respect to Scheme 6.
[0257] In step (f2) of Scheme 8-1, R4 can be added to a compound of formula (VII) using an organometallic moiety containing at least one R4 to form a compound of formula (XVII), wherein Rj can be hydrogen or unsubstituted or substituted Ci-6 alkyl; R2 can be a hydrogen substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-6 alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl; R3 can be a substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1.6 alkyl, a C3-6 cycloalkyl, a C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl; PGi can be a protecting group moiety; and R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-Ci2 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl. In some embodiments, R4 can be selected from the group consisting of: substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C3-C]2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl. Suitable organometallic moieties are described herein.
[0258] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formulae (VII) and (XVII) are shown below:
Figure imgf000102_0001
[0259J Examples of the structures of compounds of formulae (VII) and (XVII) are shown below:
Figure imgf000103_0001
[0260] A compound of formula (XVII) can also be synthesized from a compound of formula (X) by oxidizing the secondary alcohol group of the compound of formula (X)5 according to Scheme 8-2. The compound of formula (X) can be synthesized as described in Scheme 6.
Scheme 8-2:
Figure imgf000103_0002
[0261] Exemplary structures of compounds of formula (X) and (XVII) are as follows:
Figure imgf000103_0003
(X-A) (XVII)
Figure imgf000104_0001
(X-B) (XVII)
Figure imgf000104_0002
(X-IB) (XVII-I)
[0262] Additionally, a compound of formula (XVII) can be obtained via the synthetic Scheme 8-3.
Figure imgf000105_0001
[0263] A compound of formula (VII) can be synthesized from a compound of formula (V) via steps (d) and (e) of Scheme 8-3 that are described above with respect to Scheme 6. The ester of the compound of formula (VII) can be transformed to a carboxylic acid using methods known to those skilled in the art (e.g., hydrolysis by LiOH, alkaline thioates such as LiSMe, NaSMe, LiSCaHs1 etc.) which can be further transformed to acid halide using a suitable reagent (e.g. Oxalyl chloride, SOCl2 etc.) to form a compound of formula (XXXVI). In an embodiment, Ri, R3 and PGi of the compound of formula (XXXVI) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII) and X is a halogen.
[0264] Examples of the structures of compounds of formula (VII) and (XXXVI) are shown below:
Figure imgf000105_0002
(VII) (XXXVI)
Figure imgf000106_0001
(VII-I) (XXXVI-I)
[0265] The carboxylic acid/acid halide of the compound of formula (XXXVI) can be reacted with an appropriate N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride [HCLHNMe(OMe)] to form the corresponding Weinreb amide, wherein Ri, R3 and PGi can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII) and R'" and R"" can each independently be selected from the group consisting of alkyl (e.g. methyl), alkoxy (e.g. methoxy).
[0266] Exemplary structures of compounds of formula (XXXVI) and (XXXVII) are as follows:
Figure imgf000106_0002
(XXXVI) (XXXVII)
Figure imgf000106_0003
(XXXVI-I) (XXXVII-I)
[0267] The Weinreb amide of the compound of formula (XXXVII) can be reacted with an appropriate organometallic moiety containing at least one R4 to form a compound of formula (XVII). In an embodiment, Ri, R3 and PG] can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (VII) and R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-Ci2 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-Cj2 cycloalkyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkenyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocycly], aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyl oxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesuliϊnylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl. In some embodiments, R4 can be selected from the group consisting of: substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of a carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl. arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfϊnylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylρhosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl. Suitable organometallic moieties are described herein.
[0268] In certain embodiments, compounds of formulae (XXXVII) and (XVII) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000108_0001
(XXXVII-I) (XVII-I)
[0269] One method for obtaining Salinosporamide A and analogs thereof from a compound of formula (XVII) is shown in Scheme 9-1:
Scheme 9-1
Figure imgf000109_0001
Figure imgf000109_0002
Figure imgf000109_0003
Figure imgf000109_0004
[0270] As shown in step (g2) of Scheme 9-1, the aminal of a compound of formula (XVII) can be cleaved to form a compound of formula (XVIII) using an acid reagent (e.g., triflic acid or HCl). In some embodiments, Rj, R3, R4 and PGi of a compound of formula (XVIII) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVII). [0271] As an example, the compounds of formula (XVII) and (XVIII) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000110_0001
{0272] Exemplary structures of compounds of formula (XVII) and (XVIII) are shown below:
Figure imgf000110_0002
(XVII-I) (XVIII-I)
[0273] In step (h2), the C- 15 primary alcohol group of a compound of formula (XVIII) can be converted to R5, which can be selected from the group consisting of — Q=O)OR6, -C(=0)SR6, -C(=O)NR6R6 and -C(=O)Z , wherein each R6 can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl; and Z can be a halogen. The conversion of the primary alcohol group to R5 may be achieved by converting the alcohol group to a carboxylic acid (R6=H) using an appropriate oxidation conditions such as Jones oxidation. Alternatively the carboxylic acid group can be prepared from the primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XVIII) through an aldehyde. The primary alcohol group of the compound of formula (XVIII) can first be converted to aldehyde using appropriate oxidant such as Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC and then the resulting aldehyde can be oxidized further to carboxylic acid using appropriate oxidants such as a combination of sodium chlorite/sodium phosphate dibasic/2-methyl-2-butene. If desired the carboxylic acid can then be converted to an ester, a thioester, or an anhydride to form a compound of formula (XIX) using an appropriate alcohol, thiol (e.g. thiophenol, cystine), carboxylic acid (e.g. acetic acid, benzoic acid), or anhydride (e.g. acetic anhydride). In some embodiments, R3 and R4 of a compound of formula (XIX) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVIII).
[0274] Compounds of formula (XVIII) and (XIX) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000111_0001
[0275] For example the compounds of formula (XVIII) and (XIX) may have the following structures:
Figure imgf000111_0002
(XVIII-I) (XIX-I)
[0276] In step (i2) of Scheme 9-1, a compound of formula (XX) can be synthesized by removing the protecting group moiety on the compound of formula (XIX) and reductively opening the resulting hemiacetal. As an example, the hemiacetal can be reductively opened using a reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride). In some embodiments, R3, R4, and R5 of a compound of formula (XX) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XIX). [0277] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formula (XIX) and (XX) can be as follows:
Figure imgf000112_0001
[0278] For example, compounds of formula (XIX) and (XX) can have the following structures:
Figure imgf000112_0002
(XIX-I) (XIX-IA) (XX-I)
[0272] Using an appropriate base (e.g. BOPCl/pyridine), a compound of formula (XXI) can be synthesized from a compound of formula (XX) via a lactonization reaction, as shown in step (J2) of Scheme 9-1. In an embodiment, R3, R4, and R5 of a compound of formula (XXI) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XX).
-I l l- [0279] Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formula (XX) and (XXI) are shown below:
Figure imgf000113_0001
[0280] For example, compounds of formula (XX) and (XXI) can have the following structures:
Figure imgf000113_0002
(XX-I) (XXI-I)
[0281] As shown in step (k2) of Scheme 9-1, a compound of formula (XXI) can further be transformed by substituting the primary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XXI) to form a compound of formula (XXII). In some embodiments, R3 and R4 of a compound of formula (XXII) can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXI), and X can be a halogen. [0282] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formula (XXI) and (XXII) are shown below:
Figure imgf000114_0001
[0283] For example, compounds of formula (XXI) and (XXII) can have the following structures:
Figure imgf000114_0002
(XXI-I) (XXII-I)
[0284] As shown step (I2) of Scheme 9-1, the C-5 ketone group attached to the carbon adjacent to R4 of a compound of formula (XXII) can be reduced to a secondary hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) or an enzyme to form a compound of formula (XVI). In one embodiment, the compound of formula (XXII) can be reduced to the compound of formula (XVI-A) and/or (XVI-B). [0285] Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of compounds of formula (XXII) and (XVI) are shown below:
Figure imgf000115_0001
(XXII) (XVI-A) (XVI-B)
[0286J As another example, the compounds of formula (XXII) and (XVI) may have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000115_0002
(XXII-I) (xvr-iA) (XVI-
IB)
[0287] If desired, the stereochemistry of the secondary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be inverted in a single step or a multistep process, as described herein.
[0288] A compound of formula (XXI) can also be used to synthesize a compound of formula (XV), as shown in Scheme 9-1. The C-5 keto group of the compound of formula (XXI) can be reduced using an appropriate reducing agent such as those described herein to form a compound of formula (XV). The C- 13 primary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XV) can be used to obtain Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof following Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10 and 7-11 described herein. The stereochemistry of the secondary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be inverted in a single step or a multistep process, such as those described.
(0289] In certain embodiments, the compounds of formulae (XXI), (XV), and (XVI) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000116_0001
(XV-A) (XV-B) (XVI-A) (XVI-B)
Figure imgf000116_0002
Figure imgf000117_0001
(XV-IA) (XV-IB) (XVI-IA) (XVI-IB)
[0290] In some embodiments, compounds of formula (XV) can be synthesized via Scheme 9-2.
Scheme 9-2
Figure imgf000117_0002
Figure imgf000117_0004
Figure imgf000117_0003
[0291] A compound of formula (XXI) can be synthesized from a compound of formula (XVII) via steps (g2), (b.2), (i2) and fø) of Scheme 9-2 that are described above with respect to Scheme 9-1. The C-5 keto group of the compound of formula (XXI) can be reduced to a secondary hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) or an enzyme to form a heterocyclic compound of formula (XV), for example, compounds (XV-A) and/or (XV-B), wherein R3, R4, and X can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXII). [0292] Exemplary structures and stereochemistry of the compounds (XXI) and (XV) are shown below:
Figure imgf000118_0001
(XXM) (XV-IA) (XV-
IB)
[0293] The compound of formula (XV) can then be used to obtain Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof following Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10 and 7- 11 described herein.
[0294] Another method for obtaining Salinosporamide A and analogs thereof from a compound of formula (XVII) is shown in Scheme 9-3. Scheme 9-3
Figure imgf000119_0001
Figure imgf000119_0003
Figure imgf000119_0002
Figure imgf000119_0004
[0295] Preceding the cleavage of the aminal, the ketone group of a compound of formula (XVIl) can be protected using a suitable protecting group moiety/moieties to form a compound of formula (XVIIp). In some embodiments, Ri, R3, R4, and PG] can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVII)5 each Y can be an oxygen or sulfur, and RA and RB can be each independently selected from the group consisting of Cu alky I, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein RA and RB can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl. [0296] As shown in Scheme 9-3, a compound of formula (XVIIp) can be transformed to a compound of formula (XXIIp) following the methods as described with respect to steps (g2), (h2), fa), (J2), and (k2) of Scheme 9-1. As shown in Scheme 9-3, the protecting group moiety/moieties, Y-RA and Y-RB, can be removed from a compound of formula (XXIIp) using a suitable method to obtain a compound of formula (XXII). For each step, the substituents of the ketone protected compounds can be selected from the same groups as those described with respect to the corresponding unprotected compounds. For example, R3, R4, PGi and R5 of a compound of formula (XIXp) can be selected from the same groups as a compound of formula (XIX). In some embodiments, the compounds of formula (XVIIp), (XVIIIp), (XIXp), (XXp), (XXIp) and (XXIIp), can have the same structures and/or stereochemistry as the corresponding non-protected compounds of Scheme 9-1 except that the keto carbonyl group is protected with a suitable protecting group(s).
[0297] Finally, the ketone group attached to the carbon adjacent to R4 of a compound of formula (XXII) can be reduced to a hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) or an enzyme to form a compound of formula (XVI), including (XVI-A) and/or (XVI-B), wherein R3, R4, and X can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXII).
[0298] In an embodiment, compounds of formula (XV) can be synthesized from a compound of formula (XVII) is shown in Scheme 9-4.
Scheme 9-4
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000121_0002
Figure imgf000121_0003
Figure imgf000121_0004
[0299] A compound of formula (XXIp) can be synthesized from a compound of formula (XVII) via steps (g2), (h2), fø) and (J2) of Scheme 9-4 that are described above with respect to Scheme 9-1. The protecting group moiety/moieties, Y-RA and Y-RB, can be removed from a compound of formula (XXIp) using a suitable method to obtain a compound of formula (XXI). In an embodiment, R3 and R4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XVII). The C- 5 keto group of the compound of formula (XXI) can be reduced to a secondary hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) or an enzyme to form a compound of formula (XV), including (XV-A) and/or (XV-B), wherein R3 and R4 can be the same as described with respect to the compound of formula (XXII). The compound of formula (XV) can then be used to obtain Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof following Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7- 9, 7-10, and 7-11 described herein.
[0300] In certain embodiments, the compounds of formulae (XXIp), (XXI), and (XV) can have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000122_0001
(XXIp) (XXI) (XV-A) (XV-B)
Figure imgf000122_0002
(XXIp-I) (XXI-I) (XV-IA) (XV-
IB)
[0301] Additional methods for synthesizing Salinosporamide A and analogs thereof are shown below in Schemes 9-5 and 9-6. The PG1 of the compound of formula (XVII) or (XVIIp) can be removed and the resulting hemiacetal can be reductively opened as described above to form compounds of formulae (XXXVIII) and (XXXVIIIp), respectively. The aminal of the compounds of formulae (XXXVIII) and (XXXVIIIp) can be cleaved as described herein to form compounds of formula (XXXIX) and (XXXIXp), respectively. The C- 15 primary alcohol group of the compounds of formula (XXXIX) and (XXXIXp) can be converted to R5 using the methods described herein, wherein R5 which can be selected from the group consisting of -C(=O)OR6, -Ct=O)SR6, -C(^O)NR6R6 and -C(=O)Z, each Re can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: each R^ can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C]-C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl;, and Z can be a halogen. After the transformation of R5, a compound of formula (XVI) can be formed as described above with respect to Schemes 9-1 and 9-3. If desired, the C- 13 primary hydroxy group can be protected during the oxidation of C-15 hydroxy group of compounds of formulae (XXXlX) and (XXXIXp) and then removed if desired.
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000123_0003
Figure imgf000123_0002
Qi)
Figure imgf000123_0004
Scheme 9-6
Figure imgf000124_0001
Figure imgf000124_0003
Figure imgf000124_0002
Figure imgf000124_0004
[0302] Additional methods of synthesizing compounds of formula (XV) are shown in Schemes 9-7 and 9-8. The PGi of the compound of formula (XVII) or (XVIIp) can be removed and the resulting hemiacetal can be reductively opened as described above to form compounds of formulae (XXXVIII) and (XXXVIIIp), respectively. The aminal of the compounds of formulae (XXXVIII) and (XXXVIIIp) can be cleaved as described herein to form compounds of formula (XXXIX) and (XXXIXp), respectively. The C- 15 primary alcohol group of the compounds of formula (XXXIX) and (XXXIXp) can be converted to Rs using the methods described herein, wherein R5 which can be selected from the group consisting of -CC=O)OR6, -Ci=O)SR6, -CC=O)NR6R6 -C(=O)Z; each R6 can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl. trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl, and Z can be a halogen. After the transformation of R5, a compound of formula (XVI) can be formed as described above with respect to Schemes 9-1, 9-2, 9-3, and 9-4. A compound of formula (XV) obtained via the methods of Schemes 9-7 and/or 9-8 can then used to synthesize Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof following Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, and 7-1 1 as described herein.
Figure imgf000125_0001
Figure imgf000125_0003
Figure imgf000125_0002
Scheme 9-8
Figure imgf000126_0001
Figure imgf000126_0002
Figure imgf000126_0003
Figure imgf000126_0004
[0303] Examples of the structures and stereochemistry of the compounds of formulae (XXXVIII) and (XXXIX) (XXXIXp) are shown below:
Figure imgf000127_0001
[0304] In some embodiments, the compounds of formula (XXXVIIIp) and (XXXIXp) can have the same structures and/or stereochemistry as the corresponding nonprotected compounds of formulae (XXXVIII) and (XXXIX) except that the keto carbonyl group is protected with a suitable protecting group(s).
[0305] In one embodiment, Salinosporamide A (compound XVI-IA) can be obtained from a compound of formula (XXII)5 wherein R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl, R3 is methyl and X is chlorine.
Figure imgf000128_0001
(XXII-I) (XVI-IA)
[0306J Jn another embodiment, the compound of formula (XXII-I) can be converted to a compound of formula (XVI-B). If desired, the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy of the compound of formula (XVI-B) can be inverted in a single step or a multistep process to give a compound of formula (XVI-A), as previously described herein.
[0307] Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof can also be obtained from the compound of formula (XXI) and/or (XXIp). In an embodiment, the C- 13 primary hydoxy of the compounds of formulae (XXI) and (XXIp) can be modified following the procedures shown in Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, and 7-11 described herein. Reduction of the C-5 keto group to a hydroxy group using an appropriate reducing agent (e.g., sodium borohydride) to produce Salinosporamide A or analogs thereof can take place at any step shown in Schemes 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, and 7-11.
[0308] The stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted at any time using one of the methods described herein or one known to those skilled in the art. For example, the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted in the compound of formula (XV). In an embodiment, the stereochemistry of the C-5 secondary hydroxy can be inverted in a one step process as described herein (e.g., by a Mitsunobu transformation). The inversion can also take place in multistep process. In an embodiment, the C-5 secondary hydroxy group can be oxidized using an appropriate oxidizing agent (e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane, TPAP/NMO, Swern oxidation reagent, PCC, or PDC) to a keto group and then reduced to a hydroxy group using a suitable reducing agent such as sodium borohydride. In another embodiment, the keto group can be reduced via selective enzymatic transformation. In certain embodiments, the reducing enzyme is a ketoreductase such as KRED-EXP-ClA and/or KRED-EXP-B 1 Y. [0309] In some embodiments, R4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl in any of the compounds and methods described herein. In other embodiments, R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl in any of the compounds and methods described herein. In some embodiments, R4 cannot be isopropyl in any of the compounds and methods described herein. In other embodiments, R4 is isopropyl in any of the compounds and methods described herein.
EXAMPLES
[0310J Commercially available compounds were obtained from Sigma- Aldrich and were used without purification unless stated. 1H NMR, 13C NMR, and 1H-1H COSY spectra were recorded at 500 MHz on a Bruker spectrometer and chemical shifts are given in δ-values [ppm] referenced to the residual solvent peak chloroform (CDCI3) at 7.24 and 77.00, respectively. The LC-MS data were obtained from an Agilent HPI lOO HPLC equipped with an Agilent PDA detector (the mobile phase was a mixture of CH3CN and H2O) and MSD system. The optical rotations were obtained from Autopol-III automatic polarimeter and the melting point was from Mel-Temp apparatus.
EXAMPLE 1
SYNTHESIS OF α-n
Figure imgf000129_0001
[0311] To a suspension of D-serine methylester hydrochloride (25 g, 160.67 mmol) in pentane (800 mL) at room temperature were added t-butyl aldehyde (20.73 g, 241 mmol) and Et3N (17.85 g, 176.74 mmol). The reaction mixture was refluxed for 15 hrs at 50 0C using Dean-Stark apparatus. The resulting reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, filtered through celite, and the celite cake was washed with pentane (2 x 40 mL). The combined filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressured and dried under high vacuum to afford product, 1-1 (24.5 g, 131 mmol, 81.5% yield) as clear oil, which can be used without further purification. The compound 1-1 was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 2. W 2
EXAMPLE 2 SYNTHESIS OF THE ESTER PRECURSOR OF COMPOUND TII-O
Figure imgf000130_0001
Method A
[0312] To a solution of t-butylacetoacetate (30 g, 0.19 mol) in dry THF (800 mL) at 0 0C was added t-BuOK (23.41 g, 95% w/w, 0.21 mol) and the solution was stirred for about 15 minutes. Allylbromide (18.39 g, 0.152 mol) was added and the solution was stirred at 0 0C for additional 15 min. The reaction mixture was then allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for about 5 hours under an atmosphere of N2. The above reaction mixture was then cooled to 0 0C3 quenched with H2O (300 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 200 mL). The combined organic phase was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (5 cm ID x 45 cm) using a solvent gradient of 100% hexanes (1.5 L) to 1.5% EtOAc/hexanes (3 L) to 2.5% EtOAc/hexanes (1 L) to 4% EtOAc/hexanes (700 mL) to afford pure product (14.5g, 0.073 mol, 38.5% yield). Alternatively, The crude product was purified by fractional distillation (130 0C oil bath, 90-95 0C bp) under high vacuum (12 mm Hg) to afford product, the ester precursor of the compound (II- 1) (66% yield).
Method B
[03131 To a solution of t-BuOK (5Og, 95% w/w, 0.42 mol) in dry THF (1.5 L) at 0 0C was added t-butylacetoacetate (65 g, 0.41 mol) and the solution was stirred for about 15 minutes under an atmosphere of N2. Allylbromide (47g, O.39mol) was added slowly and the solution was stirred at 0 0C for about 20 hours. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for additional 15 hours. The reaction mixture was then quenched with H2O (IL) at 0 0C and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 0.5 mL). The organic phase was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by fractional distillation (130 0C oil bath, 90-95 0C bp) under high vacuum (12 mm Hg) to afford the product, the ester precursor of the compound (IM) (54 g, 0.27mol, 66% yield). 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 500 MHz) (δ): 5.68 (m, IH), 5.03 (br dd, J=I5 17 Hz, IH), 4.97 (br dd, J= 1, 10 Hz, IH), 3.35 (t, J= 7.5 IH)5 2.48 (br t, J=7.0, 2H), 2.16 (s, 3H), 1.39 (s, 9H). See Figure 3.
EXAMPLE 3 SYNTHESIS OF THE PROTECTED ESTER PRECURSOR OF COMPOUND (H-H
1 ,2-Dihydroxyethane, PPTS (0.05 eq), hexanes Reflux at 95 °C, 4-7 days
~80% (No chromatography)
Figure imgf000131_0001
Figure imgf000131_0002
[0314] To a solution of the ester precursor (45 g, 0.23 mol) in hexanes (1.6 L) were added ethylene glycol (70.5 g, 1.15 mol) and PPTS (2.85 g, 0.011 mol). The reaction mixture was refluxed at 95 0C using Dean-Stark apparatus for 6 days (Note: 28.5 g, 0.46 mol of ethylene glycol was added to the reaction mixture every two days to maintain its concentration), then cooled to room temperature. The reaction mixture was then neutralized with 800 μL of Et3N and diluted with H2O (500 mL). The organic layer was separated, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford product, the protected ester precursor of the compound (II- 1) (44 g, 0.18 mmol, 80% yield), which can be used for the next step without purification. 1H-NMR (CDCI3, 500 MHz) (δ): 5.72 (m, IH), 5.06 (dd, J=I, 17 Hz5 IH), 4.97 (d, J= 10 Hz, IH)5 3.94 (m,4H), 2.60 (dd, J=3.6, 11.5 Hz, IH), 2.43 (m, IH), 2.29 (m, IH), 1.42 (s5 9H)5 1.38 (s, 3H). See Figure 4.
EXAMPLE 4 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND TII-I)
Figure imgf000132_0001
π-i
[0315] To a solution of the ester with protecting group moieties precursor (28g, 0.1 15 mol) in CH2Cl2 (28 mL) at O 0C was added trifluoroacetic acid (TFA neat, 56 mL, 0.727 mol) and the solution was stirred for about 5 min. The reaction mixture was then allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for one hour. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH2CI2 (400 mL) and extracted with ice cold water (3 x 300 mL). The organic layer was dried over Na2Sθ4, concentrated under reduced pressure and dried under high-vacuum for about one hour (to remove the residual TFA) to afford the product, compound ΪI-1 (15.5g, 0.083 mol, 72% yield) as light yellow oil, which can be used for the next step without purification. The compound H-I was characterized by 1H- NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz): 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (δ): 5.77 (m, IH), 5.10 (br dd, J=I, 17 Hz, IH), 5.02 (br d, J= 10 Hz, IH)5 4.00 (m, 4H), 2.76 (dd, J=3.8, 11.0 Hz, IH)5 2.43 (m, 2H)5 1.41 (s, 3H). See Figure 5.
EXAMPLE 5 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND CIII-I)
Figure imgf000132_0002
III-l
[0316] To a solution of compound II-l (4.8g, 25.81 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (200 mL) at 0 0C were added Et3N (7.82g5 77.42 mmol) and methanesulfonyl chloride (5.89g, 51.62 mmol) and the solution was stirred for about 10 min. Then compound 1-1 (5.3 Ig, 28.4 mmol) was added, the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature slowly and stirred for about 15 hrs. Then the reaction mixture was quenched with H2O (200 mL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 100 mL). The combined organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a mixture of two diastereomers (3:2). See Figure 6b. The crude product was purified by silica flash chromatography (3 cm ID x 30 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1 (500 mL) to 9:1 (500 mL) to 17:3 (500 mL) to 4:1 (1.5 L) to 3:1 (1 L) hexane/EtOAc to afford the product, compound III-l (6g, 16.9 mmol, 65.5% yield). The compound III-l was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 6. MS (ESI) m/z 356 [M+H].
EXAMPLE 6 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND OV- n
Figure imgf000133_0001
[0317] Method A: To a solution of compound III-l (6 g, 16.9 mmol) in CH3CN (350 mL) were added sodium iodide (3.3 g, 21.97 mmol) and cerium (III) chloride heptahydrate (9.45 g, 25.35 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 60- 650C for 4 hours (the reaction progress can be monitored by LC-MS). The above reaction mixture was then quenched with water (200 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 150 mL). The combined organic layer (cloudy) was concentrated under reduced pressure to remove all of the CH3CN/EtOAc, leaving about 20 mL OfH2O (CH3CN soluble part), which was further extracted with EtOAc (100 mL). The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the product, IV-I (4.4 g, 14.2 mmol, 83.5% yield) as a mixture of two diasteromers (3:2). See Figure 7e. If desired, the product can be used for the next step without purification. The compound IV-I was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) and NOESY (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figures 7a and 7b. MS (ESI) m/z 312 [M+H]. A portion of the product was further purified by reverse phase HPLC using C- 18 column (150 mm x 21 mm), and an isocratic solvent system of 40% acetonitrile in H2O at a flowrate of 14.5 mL/min to afford individual diastereomers IV-IA and IV-IB as pure samples. The diastereomers IV-IA and IV-IB were characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figures 7c and Id.
[0318] Compound IV-IA: 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (δ): 5.73 (m, IH), 5.34 (s, IH), 5.12 (m, IH)9 5.05 (d, J- 10.1 Hz3 IH), 4.64 (d, J = 6.3 Hz, IH), 4.53 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, IH), 3.90 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, IH)5 3.80, (s, 3H), 3.67 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, IH), 2.60 (m, 2H), 2.27 (s, 3H), 0.91 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z 312 [M+H]+.
[0319] Compound IV-IB: 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (δ): 5.76 (m, IH), 5.28 (s, IH), 5.18 (br d, J= 17.3 Hz IH), 5.08 (d, J= 10.1 Hz, IH), 4.88 (m, IH), 4.52 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, IH), 3.88 (m, IH), 3.81, (m, IH), 3.76 (s, 3H), 2.88 (m, IH), 2.63 (m, IH), 2.21 (s, 3H), 0.86 (s, 9H); MS (ESI) m/z 312 [M+H]+.
[0320] Method B: A mixture of compound IH-I (175 mg, 0.493 mmol) and iodine (12.52 mg, 0.0493 mmol) in acetone (20 mL) was refluxed at 56 0C for one hour. The reaction mixture was then cooled to RT, the acetone was removed under reduced pressure, and the crude reaction product was dissolved in CH2Cb (20 mL). The CH2Cl2 solution was washed successively with 5% aqueous sodium thiosulfate (10 mL), H2O (10 mL) and brine (10 mL). The resulting organic phase was dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by silica gel plug column (2.5 cm ID x 6 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1(50 mL) to 9:1 (100 mL) to 4:1 (100 mL) to 3:1 (100 mL) to 7:3 (100 mL) hexanes/EtOAc to afford the product, compound IV-I (97 mg, 0.312 mmol, 63.3% yield).
[0321] Method C: A mixture of compound III-l (500 rng5 1.40 mmol) and LiBF4 (200 mg, 2.1 mmol) in CH3CN (6 mL, wet with 2% H2O) was stirred at 70 0C for 1.5 to 2 hrs (the reaction progress can be monitored by LC-MS). The above reaction mixture was then quickly cooled to 0 0C, filtered through a short silica plug and concentrated under reduced pressure. The product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (1.25 cm ID x 5 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1 (50 mL) to 9:1 (50 mL) to 4:1 (50 mL) hexanes/EtOAc to afford the purified product, compound IV-I (260 mg, 0.84 mmol, 60% yield). EXAMPLE 7 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND CV- 1 A)
Figure imgf000135_0001
[0322] To a solution of compound IV-I (26 g, 83.6 mmol) in dry THF (2.7 L) at RT was added t-BuOK (4.68 g, 41.8 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at RT for 15 min under an atmosphere of N2 and then quenched with H2O (900 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 400 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with saturated brine solution, dried over Na2Sθ4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The reaction mixture was dissolved in 1 :1 ether : hexanes (75 mL each) and transferred to a crystallization dish, where it was allowed to stand and crystallize. After an hour, the crystals (1st crop) were separated by decanting the mother liquor. The crystals were washed with ether (2 x 10 mL) and hexanes (2 x 10 mL). The combined mother liquor and washes was concentrated under reduced pressure and redissolved in 1:1 etherhexanes (50 mL each) and the crystallization process was repeated the crystallization process as described above. The crystals (2nd crop) were separated by decanting the mother liquor. The crystals were washed with ether (2 x 10 mL) and hexanes (2 x 10 mL). The two crops of crystals were combined to obtain compound V-IA (13.5 g, 43.4 mmol, 51.9% yield by crystallization). The mother liquor was chromatographed on a silica gel flash column (30 x 4 cm) using solvent gradient of 19: 1 (500 mL) to 9:1 (1 L) to 17:3 (500 mL) EtOAc/hexanes to yield the compound XXIX-I (2.47 g), compound V-IA (3.05 g), compound V-IB (250 mg as a mixture) and compound V-IC (1.81 g). The two crops of crystals were combined to obtain a total yield of 63.6% of the compound V-IA. Compound V-IA was obtained as a colorless crystalline material. The structures of compounds V-IB, V-IC, and XXIX-I are shown below.
[0323] Compound V-IA: 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (δ): 5.96 (m, IH), 5.15 (br dd, J= 1.5, 17.2 Hz, IH), 5.05 (d, J= 10.1 Hz, IH), 4.93 (s, IH), 4.50 (d, J= 8.9 Hz5 IH)3 4.26 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, IH), 3.77 (s, 3H), 3.10 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, IH), 2.56 (m, IH), 2.31 (m, IH), 1.96 (s, IH), 1.30 (S5 3H), 0.87 (s, 9H). 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz) (δ): 177.9, 171.8, 136.7, 116.6, 96.7, 80.4, 79.2, 68.0, 53.3, 52.6, 36.5, 27.9, 25.0 (3xCH3), 23.0. M.P. 1 13-1 14 0C (crystals obtained from 1 : 1 ; diethyl etheπhexanes). [α]22 D 8.4 (c 0.96, CH3CN). MS (ESI) m/z 312 (M+H). See Figure 8.
[0324] The compound V-IA was also characterized by 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz) and 1H - 1H COSY NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figures 9 and 10. The structure of compound V-IA was confirmed by x-ray crystallography, as shown in Figure 11.
Figure imgf000136_0001
V-IB V-IC XXIX-I
[0325] Compound V-IB: Compound V-IB was purified by reversed phase HPLC using the solvent gradient of 30% to 70% CH3CN/H2O over 30 min, at a flow rate of 14.5 mL/min to yield pure compound. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (δ): 5.88 (m, IH), 5.09 (br dd, J= 1.5, 17 Hz , 2H), 4.9 (s, IH), 4.52 (d, J= 9 Hz5 IH)5 4.2 (d, J= 9 Hz, IH), 3.77 (s, 3H), 2.68 (m, IH), 2.51 (t, J= 7 Hz, IH), 2.45 (m, IH)5 1.29 (s, 3H), 0.89 (s, 9H). See Figure 25. MS (ESI) m/z 312 [M+HJ+. The structure was confirmed by x-ray crystallography, Figure 26.
[0326] Compound V-IC: 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (δ): 5.93 (m, IH)5 5.16 (br dd, J = I5 17 Hz , IH)5 5.06 (br d, J = 10 Hz , IH), 4.88 (s, I H), 4.58 (d, J = 9.5 Hz, IH), 3.96 (d, J = 9.5 Hz5 IH), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.43 (dd, J= 6.3, 8.5 Hz5 IH), 2.53 (m, IH), 2.17 (m, IH)5 1.27 (s, 3H)5 0.86 (s, 9H). See Figure 27. 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz) (δ): 175.8, 171.5, 135.8, 116.9, 96.2, 80.9, 78.3, 68.8, 53.3, 52.6, 36.5, 28.8, 25.0, 20.2. See Figure 28. MS (ESI) m/z 312 [M+H]+. The relative stereochemistry was determined by NOESY, Figure 29.
[0327] Compound of XXIX-1: 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (δ): 5.81 (m, IH), 5.04 (br dd, J = 1.5, 7.5 Hz, IH), 5.02 (s, IH), 4.78 (d, J= 8.5 Hz , IH), 4.66 (s, IH), 3.74 (s, 3H), 3.18 (d, J = 8.5 Hz , IH), 2.97 (t, J = 6.5 Hz , IH), 1.83 (s, 3H), 0.91 (s, 9H). See Figure 30. 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz) (δ): 178.4, 170.0, 151.9, 133.4, 132.8, 116.1, 96.9, 78.0, 70.5, 52.9, 35.2, 27.6, 24.7, 12.1. See Figure 31. MS (ESI) m/∑ 294
EXAMPLE 8 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND (VI- n
Figure imgf000137_0001
(0328] To a solution of compound V-IA (530 mg, 1.7 mmol) in THF/H2O (1 :1, 12 mL) were added NMO (50% w/w aqueous solution, 750 μL, 3.4 mmol) and OsO4 (2.5% wt.% in 2-methyl-2-propanol, 1.1 mL, 0.085 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at RT for 17 hours. Then, NaIO4 (250 mg, 1.16 mmol) was added to the above reaction mixture and stirred for additional 3 hrs at 25 0C. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated Na2S2O3 (10 mL) and saturated NaHCO3 (10 mL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 20 mL). The combined organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by silica flash chromatography (1.25 cm ID x 5 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1(50 mL) to 9:1 (50 mL) to 4:1 (50 mL) hexanes/EtOAc to afford compound VI-I (170 mg, 0.54 mmol, 94%) as a mixture of diastereomers. The compound VI-I was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 12. MS (ESI) m/z 314 [M+H].
W
EXAMPLE 9 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND TVII-I)
Figure imgf000138_0001
VI-I VII-Ia VII-Ib
[0329J To a solution of compound VI-I (170 mg, 0.54 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (3 mL) was added BnOH (170 μl, 1.64 mmol) followed by BF3.Et20 (20 μl, 0.16 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 15 hours. Then Et3N (100 μl, 0.7 mmol) was added to the above reaction mixture which was directly concentrated, followed by silica flash column (1.25 cm ID x 5 cm) chromatography using a solvent gradient of 19:1(50 mL) to 9:1 (50 mL) to 4:1 (50 mL) hexanes/EtOAc to afford compound VII-I a (S3 mg, 0.21 mmol) and compound VII-Ib (104 mg, 0.26 mmol). 86% total yield of compound VII-I8 and compound VII-I b-
[0330] Compound VII-I8: 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (δ): 7.30 (m, 5H)5 5.24 (dd, J = 4.4, 6.3 Hz , IH), 4.77 (s, IH)3 4.72 (d, J= 12.0 Hz, IH), 4.64 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, IH), 4.45 (d, J= 11.7 Hz, IH), 4.17 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, IH), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.36 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, IH), 2.81 (ddd, J= 1.0, 6.3, 14.2 Hz, IH), 2.13 (m, IH), 1.37 (s, 3H), 0.86 (s, 9H). See Figure 13.
10331] Compound VII-lb: 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (δ): 7.27 (m, 5H), 5.19 (d, J = 5.0 Hz , IH), 4.65 (d, J= 1 1.4 Hz, IH), 4.65 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, IH), 4.60 (s, 1H),4.45 (d, J= 12.0 Hz, IH), 4.21 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, IH), 3.76 (s, 3H), 3.17 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, IH), 2.60 (d, J = 13.2 Hz, IH), 2.13 (m, IH), 1.23 (s, 3H), 0.82 (s, 9H). MS (ESI) m/z 404 [M+H]. See Figure 14.
[0332] The structure of compound VII-I b was confirmed by crystal structure, as shown in Figure 15. EXAMPLE 10 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND (VIII- K )
Figure imgf000139_0001
VII-Ib VIIMb
[0333] To a solution of compound VII-I b (40 mg, 0.1 mmol) in dry THF (2 mL) at -20 0C was added LiAlH4 (2.0 M, 75 μl, 0.15 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm up to -5 0C in 10 min and stirred for an additional 20 min. The reaction mixture was then quenched with saturated aqueous potassium sodium tartrate (5 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 5 ml). The combined organic layer was dried with MgSO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a crude product which was purified by silica flash chromatography (column 1.25 cm ID x 10 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1(50 mL) to 9:1 (100 mL)'to 4:1 (200 mL) hexanes/EtOAc to afford the product, compound VIII-Ib (19 mg, 0.051 mmol, 50% yield). The compound VIII-lb was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 16. MS (ESI) m/z 376 [M+H].
EXAMPLE I l SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND (VIII-U)
Figure imgf000139_0002
[0334] To a solution of compound VII-I8 (90 mg, 0.22 mmol) in dry THF (5 mL) was added lithium borohydride (2M solution in THF, 558 uL, I.I mmol,) and stirred W
at RT . After 15 minutes of stirring, methanol (100 uL) was added to the reaction mixture at RT (room temperature was maintained by cooling the reaction mixture with water bath). After 3 hours of additional stirring, the reaction mixture was quenched with H2O (20 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (2 x 20 mL). The combined organic layer was washed with brine (20 mL), dried over Na2S O4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the product, compound VIII-I8 as clear oil (75 mg, 0.2 mmol, 90.9% yield), which can be used in the next step without any column chromatography. The compound VIII-la was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 17. MS (ESI) m/z 376 [M+H] and 398 [M+Na].
EXAMPLE 12 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND (IX- \ H)
Figure imgf000140_0001
10335] To a solution of VIII-lb (30 mg, 0.08 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (1 ml) were added NMO (28 mg, 0.24 mmol) and TPAP (3.0 mg, 0.008 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at RT for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was then concentrated and purified by silica flash chromatography (column 1.25 cm ID x 10 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1 (50 mL) to 9:1 (100 mL) to 17:3 (200 mL) hexanes/EtOAc to afford the product, compound IX-Ib , as clear oil (27 mg, 0.072 mmol, 90% yield). The compound IX-Ib was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 18. MS (ESI) m/z 374 [M+H]. EXAMPLE 13 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND flX-1,)
Figure imgf000141_0001
VIIMa IX-I8
[0336] To a solution of alcohol, compound VIII-I8 (40 mg, 0.107 mmol) in dry CH2Cl2 (3 ml) were added NMO (37.5 mg, 0.32 mmol) and TPAP (3.78 mg, 0.01 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at RT for 18 hours. The above reaction mixture was then concentrated and purified by silica flash chromatography (column 2.5 cm ID x 6 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1(50 mL) to 9:1 (100 mL) to 17:3 (200 mL) hexanes/EtOAc to afford the product, compound IX-I3 , as a white solid (34 mg, 0.091 mmol, 85.5% yield). The compound IX-I8 was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 19. MS (ESI) m/z 374 [M+H] and 396 [M+Na].
EXAMPLE 14 SYNTHESIS OF 9-CYCLOHEX-2-ENYL-9-BORABICYCLOr3.3.11NONANE
Figure imgf000141_0002
cyclohexa-l ,3-diene 9-BBN
[0337] To a solution of 9-borabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane (9-BBN) in THF (0.5 M, 10.0 ml, 5.0 mmol) was added 1,3-cyclohexadiene (97%) (490 μl, 5.0 mmol) and stirred for 24 hrs at RT to afford a solution of 9-cyclohex-2-enyl-9-BBN in THF (0.5 M) which was directly used to couple with compound of formula IX-I. EXAMPLE 15 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND TX-UB)
Figure imgf000142_0001
[0338] To a solution of compound IX-lb (20 mg, 0.053 mmol) in THF (0.5 ml) at -78 0C was added the 9-cyclohex-2-enyl-9-BBN solution (see Example 12) in THF (0.5 M, 320 μl, 0.16 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to RT over 1.5 hr and stirred for additional 10 hrs at RT. Ethylamine (16 μl, 0.265 mmol) was then added to the above reaction mixture, and stirring continued for an additional 16 hrs at RT. The reaction mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was purified by silica flash chromatography (column 1.25 cm ID x 10 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1(50 mL) to 9:1 (100 mL) to 17:3 (200 mL) hexanes/EtOAc to afford the product, compound X-IbB, as a white solid (17.0 mg, 0.037 mmol, 70.4%) which was crystallized from hexanes/ethylether (1 :1). The compound X-IbB was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz)5 and 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz). See Figures 20 and 21. The structure of compound X-IbB was confirmed by X-ray crystal structure. See Figure 22. MS (ESI) m/z 456 [M+H] and 478 [M+Na].
EXAMPLE 16 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND TX-LB)
Figure imgf000142_0002
[Q339J To a solution of aldehyde, compound IX-I8 , (60 mg, 0.161 mmol) in THF (2.0 mL) at -78 0C was added the 9-cyclohex-2-enyl-9-BBN solution in THF (0.5 M, 0.96 mL, 0.48 mmol) and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to RT over 1.5 hr and stirred for additional 10 hrs at RT. Ethylamine (50 μl, 0.81 mmol) was then added to the above reaction mixture, and stirring continued for an additional 16 hrs at RT. The reaction mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was purified by silica flash chromatography (column 1.25 cm ID x 10 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1(50 mL) to 9:1 (200 mL) of hexanes/EtOAc to afford a pure product, a compound X-I8B (52.0 mg, 0.114 mmol, 70.9%). The compound X-I8B was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz), and 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz). See Figures 23 and 24. MS (ESI) m/z 456 [M+H] and 478 [M+Na].
EXAMPLE 17 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND fXXII-n
Dess-Martin Periodinane
Figure imgf000143_0001
XVI-IB XXII-I
[0340] To a solution of compound XVI-IB (3.5 mg, 11.2 μmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 ml) in a scintillation vial (20 ml) were added Dess-Martin periodinane (23.7 mg; 56 μmol) and a magnetic stir bar. The reaction mixture was stirred at RT for about 16 hours. The progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC. The reaction mixture was then filtered through a membrane filter (0.2 μrn) and purified by normal phase HPLC using a Phenomenex Luna 1Ou Silica column (25 cm x 21.2 mm ID), ELSD detector, a solvent gradient of 25% to 80% EtOAc/hexanes over 19 min, 80 to 100% EtOAc/hexanes over 1 min, holding at 100% EtOAc for 5 min, at a flow rate of 14.5 ml/min to afford a pure compound of formula XXII-I. 1H NMR (DMSO-J6, 500 MHz) δ 1.54 (s, 3H), 1.59 (m, 2H)5 1.66-1.70 (m, IH), 1.73-1.80 (m, IH)5 1.96 (m, 2H)5 2.0-2.11 (m, 2H), 3.09 (t, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 3.63 (brs, IH)5 3.83-3.88 (m, IH), 3.89-3.93 (m, IH)3 5.50 (dd, IH, J = 2, 10 Hz), 5.92 (dd, IH, J = 2.5, 10 Hz), 9.70 (s, IH5 NH); MS (ESI), m/z 312 (M+H)+ and 334 (IvB-Na)+.
EXAMPLE 18 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND fXVHA) VIA CHEMICAL REDUCTION
Figure imgf000144_0001
XXII-I XVI-IA
[0341] The compound of formula XVI-IA was synthesized by reducing the keto group of the compound of formula XXII-I with a common reducing agent(s) under various reaction conditions as shown in the Table 1.
TABLE 1£
Figure imgf000145_0001
EXAMPLE 19
SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND (XVI-IA) FROM COMPOUND Q(XII-H VIA ENZYMATIC REDUCTION
Figure imgf000146_0001
XXII l XVI l A
[0342 J Method A: Compound XXII-I was subjected to enzymatic reduction using ketoreductases KRED-EXP-ClA and KRED-EXP-Bl Y (BioCatalytics, Pasadena CA). 20 mM of compound XXII-I (62 mg, added as a DMSO solution, 0.4 mL), 60 mg of KRED-EXP-ClA or KRED-EXP-BlY, 50 mM sodium formate 1 mM NAD+ and 30 mg of FDH-101 were dissolved in 1OmL of phosphate buffer (150 mM, pH 6.9). The reaction was stirred at 30 0C for 1 hour before it was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were evaporated to dryness using a speed-vacuum giving the product, compound XVI-IA3 as a solid white powder. HPLC analysis (C 18 reverse phase column (ACE Cl 8, 5 m 150 X 4/6 nm)) and NMR showed only the formation of XVI- IA5 as shown in Table 2. Both KRED-EXP-ClA and KRED-EXP-BlY showed product formation. No detectable formation of the other diastereomeric alcohol, compound of formula XVI-IB was observed.
TABLE 2
Ketoreductase XXII-I XVI-IA XVI-IB
KRED-EXP-ClA 18%7 82% Not detected
KRED-EXP-Bl Y 21%' 79% Not detected
Includes a minor impurity similar to compound (XXII-I) in the calculated yield
[0343] Reactions ( 10- 100 mg scale) were performed on KRED-EXP-C 1 A and KRED-EXP-Bl Y using glucose and glucose dehydrogenase (GDH) as a cofactor recycler at pH 6.9 (Method B is the optimized procedure). The products were extracted with EtOAc and analyzed by HPLC. The results are shown in Table 3.
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000147_0001
3At pH 6.9 using GDH5 NAD, glucose bBased on HPLC analysis of organic extract c R- ecovered yield 40% after purification by flash column chromatography. Some decomposition product was detected in aqueous layer dRecovered yield 90% after purification by flash column chromatography eRecovered yield 85% after purification by crystallization
[0344] As shown in Table 3, when KRED-EXP-ClA ketoreductase was used, the conversion from XXII-I to XVI-IA was 70% complete after 1 h on 10 mg scale. Based on HPLC analysis of the organic extract, the conversion was 90% complete when the reaction time was increased to 3 h, but subsequent evaluation of the aqueous extract revealed that a portion of the product had decomposed, which is an expected hydrolysis product that forms in aqueous solution. The decomposition product has the structure shown below. Decomposition was minimized when biphasic solutions (50% aqueous t- BuOAc, n-BuOAc, TBME) were used, but the percent conversion was generally very low even with longer reaction times (20-24 h), except in 50% aqueous TBME. Of the two ketoreductase, KRED-EXP-BlY ketoreductase was superior to KRED-EXP-ClA in the conversion of XXII-I to XVI-IA. Doubling the concentrations of KRED-EXP-BlY and GDH and decreasing the reaction time resulted in better yields and minimal decomposition of product (2-5%).
Decomposition product:
Figure imgf000148_0001
[0345] Method B: see Example 31.
Figure imgf000148_0002
Method A: 1 ) HCI (0.5 M); 2) NaBH4
Method B : 1) Na/NH3 (Hq.); 2) NaBH4 X-IbB XXIII-IB
[0346] Method A: To a solution of X-lbB (400 mg, 0.88 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added aqueous HCl (0.5 M, 2 mL). The reaction mixture was warmed to 60 0C and stirred for 10 hrs at this temperature. The above reaction mixture was diluted with H2O (20 mL), then extracted with EtOAc (2 X 20 mL) and CH2Cl2 (3 X 20 mL). The combined organic phase was dried over MgSθ4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude residue was re-dissolved in THF /H2O ((2:1; 22.5 mL), then NaBH4 (100 mg, 2.63 mmol) was added and stirred at 25 0C for 30 min. The reaction mixture was diluted with H2O (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2 X 20 mL) and CH2Cl2 (3 X 20 mL), and the organic phase was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford XXIII-IB as crude white solid (260 mg, 81%) which can be used in the next step without purification. The compound XXIII-IB was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz)7 and 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz). See Figures 32 and 33. MS (ESI) m/z 368.3 [M+H] +.
[0347] Method B: Sodium metal (Na, 30mg, 1.30 mmol) was dissolved in liquid ammonia (3 mL) at -78 0C and the resultant dark blue mixture was stirred for 5 min. A solution of X-lbB (30mg, 0.066 mmol) in dry THF (0.5 ml) was slowly added to the above reaction mixture and stirred at -78 0C for an additional 2 hrs. Solid ammonium chloride (NH4Cl, 40mg) was added slowly to the reaction mixture, which was then allowed to warm to RT (by removing the dry ice-acetone cold bath). Ammonia was evaporated during warm up. The white residue was washed with brine and extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was concentrated to afford crude hemiacetal, which was directly used in the next reaction without purification.
[0348] To a solution of the above hemiacetal in THF:H2O (2:1; 1.5 mL) was added NaBH4 (8 mg, 0.20 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hr at RT and then diluted with brine and extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was dried with MgSO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by silica flash chromatography (EtOAc in hexanes, 10% to 30%) to afford triol XXIII-IB as clear oil (18 mg, 0.049 mmol, 74.2% yield over two steps). The compound XXIII-IB was characterized by 1H- NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz), and 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz). See Figures 32 and 33. MS (ESI) m/z 368.3 [M+H] +.
EXAMPLE 21 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND (XXIII-IB) VIA (X-I3B)
Figure imgf000149_0001
X-laB XXHI-IB
[0349] Sodium metal (Na, 20mg, 0.88 mmol) was dissolved in liquid ammonia (3ml) at -78 0C and the resultant dark blue mixture was stirred for 5 min. A solution of compound X-I8B (20mg, 0.044 mmol) in dry THF (0.5 ml) was slowly added to the above reaction mixture and stirred at -78 0C for additional 2 hrs. Solid ammonium chloride (NH4Cl, 30mg) was added slowly to the reaction mixture, which was then allowed to warm to RT (by removing the dry ice-acetone cold bath). Ammonia was evaporated during warm up. The white residue was washed with brine and extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford crude hemiacetal which was directly used in the next reaction without purification.
[0350] To a solution of the above hemiacetal in THFrH2O (2:1 ; 1.5 ml) was added NaBH4 (5 mg, 0.13 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hr at RT and then diluted with brine and extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was dried with MgSO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by silica flash chromatography (EtOAc in hexanes, 10% to 30%) to afford triol XXIII-IB as clear oil (11.3 mg, 0.031 mmol, 70% yield over two steps). The 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) and 13C-NMR (CDCI3, 125 MHz) spectra were the same as shown Figures 32 and 33, respectively. MS (ESI) m/z 368.3 [M+H].
EXAMPLE 22 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND fXXIV-lB') VIA fXXIII- IB-BzI
Figure imgf000150_0001
XXIII-IB XXIV-IB-Bz
[0351] To a solution of XXIIMB (120 mg, 0.33 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) were added Et3N (120 μl, 0.86 mmol) and benzoyl chloride (BzCl, 60 μl, 0.52 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 10 hrs. Then the reaction mixture was directly concentrated under reduced pressure and the resulting product was purified by silica flash chromatography (EtOAc in hexanes, 10% to 30%) to afford XXIV-IB-Bz (136 mg, 0.29 mmol, 87%). The compound XXIV-IB-Bz was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 34. MS (ESI) m/z 472.3 [M+H]+. EXAMPLE 23 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND OCXV-IB-Bz) VIA (XXW-IB-Bz)
Figure imgf000151_0001
XXIV-IB-Bz XXV lB-Bz
[0352] To a solution of XXIV-IB-Bz (136 mg, 0.29 mmol) in CF3CH2OH (2 mL) were added 1,3-propanedithiol (200 μl, 2 mmol) and a catalytic amount of aqueous HCI (12N, 10 μL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 0C for 3-4 hr, concentrated under reduced pressure and the resulting crude product was then purified by silica flash chromatography (EtOAc in hexanes, 20% to 80%) to afford XXV-IB-Bz (110 mg, 0.27 mmol, 94%). The compound XXV-IB-Bz was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz), and 13C-NMR (CDCl33 125 MHz). See Figures 35 and 36. MS (ESI) m/z 404.3 [M+H]+.
EXAMPLE 24 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND OCXVp- IB-Bz-TMS) VIA fXXV- IB-Bz)
Figure imgf000151_0002
XXV-IB-Bz XXVp-lB-Bz-TMS
[0353] To a solution of XXV-IB-Bz (70 mg, 0.17 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) were added Et3N (480 μL, 3.47 mmol) and TMSCl (220 μL, 1.74 mmol) and the solution was stirred at 25 0C for 12 hrs. The reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (5 mL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 5 mL). The combined organic phase was dried over MgSO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and then purified by silica flash chromatography (EtOAc in hexanes, 20% to 80%) to afford XXVp-I B-Bz-TMS (44 mg5 0.093 rnmol, 53% yield). The compound XXVp-lB-Bz-TMS was characterized by 1H- NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz), and 13C-NMR (CDCl3- 125 MHz). See Figures 37 and 38. MS (ESI) m/z 476.3 [M+H]+.
EXAMPLE 25 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND (XXVI-I B-Bz) VIA (XXVp- IB-Bz-TMS^)
Figure imgf000152_0001
XXVp-lB-Bz-TMS XXVMB-Bz
[0354] To a solution of XXVp-lB-Bz-TMS (120 mg, 0.25 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) was added Dess-Martin periodinane (118 mg, 0.278 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 2 hrs. The reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous Na2S2O3 (3 mL) and saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (2 mL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (2 x 5 mL). The combined organic phase was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the crude aldehyde as a white powder which was used for the next step without purification.
[0355] To a solution of the above freshly prepared aldehyde in t-BuOH/H2θ (2:1 ; 4.5 mL) was added NaH2PO4 (400 mg, 3.33 mmol) and the reaction mixture was cooled to 0 0C. Then 2-methyl-2-butene (2M in THF, 3.70 mL, 7.57 mmol) and NaClO2 (175 mg, 1.93 mmol) were added sequentially and stirred at 0 0C for 1.5 hrs. The reaction mixture was then diluted with brine (5 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 5mL). The aqueous phase was acidified with HCl (0.5 M) to pH 3.0 and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 5 mL). The combined organic phase was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a white solid residue which was purified by reversed phase HPLC using an ACE 5μ C18 column (150 x 21 mm ID) and a solvent gradient of 10% to 100% CH3CN/H2O/0.05%TFA over 22 min, holding at 100% CH3CN/0.05%TFA for 3 min at a flow rate of 14.5 mL/min to afford the carboxylic acid XXVI-IB-Bz (66 mg, 0.16 mmol, 62.6% yield over two steps). The carboxylic acid XXVI-IB-Bz was characterized by 1H-NMR (CD3OD, 500 MHz), and 13C-NMR (CD3OD, 125 MHz). See Figures 39 and 40. MS (ESI) m/z 418.2 [M+Hj+.
EXAMPLE 26 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND fXV- 1 B) VIA rXXVI-IB-Bz^
Figure imgf000153_0001
(XXVI-IB) (XX VII-IB) (XXVI-IB) PG3 = Bz PG3 = TBS or TES
Figure imgf000153_0002
[0356] Method A: 1) K2CO3, MeOH; H+; 2) TBSCl, imid.; 3) BOPCl; 4) HF.Pyr
[0357] To a solution of XXVI-IB-Bz ( 14 mg, 0.033 mmol) in MeOH (0.5 ml) was added K2CO3 (14 mg, 0.10 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 15 hrs. Then aqueous HCl (200 μl, 1.0 M) was added to this reaction mixture which was directly concentrated and dried under high vacuum to afford XXVII-IB in which the benzoyl group has been replaced by hydrogen as a white residue, which was directly used in the next step without further purification.
[0358] To a solution of the product obtained from the previous step in CH2Cl2 (0.50 ml) were added imidazole (7.0 mg, 0.10 mmol) and TBSCl (10 mg, 0.066 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 10 hrs. Then the reaction mixture was directly concentrated under reduced pressure and dried well by high vacuum to afford XXVI-IB- TBS a white residue, which was directly used in the next step without further purification.
[0359] To a solution of XXVI-IB-TBS in CH3CN (0.40 ml) were added pyridine (0.40 ml) and BOPCl (17 mg, 0.066 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 16 hrs. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the products purified by silica gel chromatography using EtOAc/hexanes gradients (20% to 80%) to afford the XXVIII-1B-TBS (5.0 mg; 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) See Figure 41) and XV-IB (3.0 mg) as white solid.
[0360] To a solution of the above XXVIII-IB-TBS (5.0 mg) in THF (0.5 ml) were added pyridine (30 μl) and HFpyridine (30 μl) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 2 hrs in a plastic tube. Then the reaction mixture was quenched with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (1 ml) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 1.0 ml). The organic phase was dried over MgSO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by silica gel flash chromatography using a EtOAc/hexanes gradient (20% to 80%) to afford XV-IB (4.0 mg, 0.013 mmol). Overall Yield = 73%. The compound XV-IB was characterized by 1H- NMR (acetone-de, 500 MHz), and 13C-NMR (acetone-d6, 125 MHz). See Figures 42 and 43. MS (ESI) m/z 296 [M+H]+.
[0361] Method B: 1) K2CO3, MeOH; H+; 2) TESCl, imid.; 3) BOPCl; 4) HF.Pyr 28%
[0362] To a solution of XXVI-IB-Bz (240 mg, 0.575 mmol) in MeOH (3.0 ml) was added K2Cθ3 (240 mg, 1.74 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 15 hrs. Then aqueous HCl (600 μl, 1.0 M) was added to this reaction mixture which was directly concentrated and dried under high vacuum to afford XXVII-IB as a white residue, which was directly used for the next step without further purification.
[0363] To a solution of the product obtained from the previous step in CH2Cb (5.0 ml) was added imidazole (195 mg, 2.87 mmol) and TESCl (0.39 ml, 2.30 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 18 hrs. Then the reaction mixture was directly concentrated under reduced pressure and dried well by high vacuum to afford XXVI-IB-TES as a white residue, which was directly used in the next step without further purification.
[0364] To a solution of XXVI-IB-TES in CH3CN (3.0 ml) were added pyridine (3.0 ml) and BOPCl (290 mg, 1.15 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 18 hrs. Then the reaction mixture was filtered through a short silica-plug; the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and dried by high vacuum to afford TES -β-lactone XXVIII-1B-TES as a white residue, which was directly used in the next step without further purification.
[0365] To a solution of the above TES-β-lactone residue (XXVIII-IB-TES) in THF (5.0 ml) were added pyridine (150 μl) and HF .pyridine (150 μl) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 25 0C for 5-6 hrs in a plastic tube. Then the reaction mixture was quenched with saturated aqueous NaHCC»3 (10 ml) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 10 ml). The organic phase was dried over MgSO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by silica flash chromatography (EtOAc in hexanes, 10% to 80%) to afford β- lactone XV-IB (47.0 mg, 0.16 mmol). Overall Yield = 28%.
EXAMPLE 27 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND (XVI-IB) VIA fXV-lB)
Figure imgf000155_0001
[0366] To a solution of XV-IB (35 mg, 0.1 18 mmol) obtained from Example 26 in CH3CN (250 μl) were added pyridine (250 μl) and Ph3PCl2 (80 mg, 0.24 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at RT for 18 hrs. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by silica gel flash chromatography using a EtOAc/hexanes gradient (5% to 20%) to afford XVI-IB (21 mg, 57% yield). The compound XVI-IB was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) and 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz). See Figures 44 and 45. MS (ESI) m/z 314 [M+H]+. MS (ESI) m/z 314 [M+H]+. HRMS (ESI) tn/z 314.1151 [M+H]+ (calcd for Ci 5H2) ClNO4, 314.1159, Δ = -2.4 ppm).
EXAMPLE 28 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND fXXII-l) VIA (XVI-IB)
Figure imgf000156_0001
XVI lB XXII-I
[0367] To a solution of compound XVI-IB (10 mg, 32 μmol) obtained from Example 27 in CH2Cl2 (4 mL) in a round bottom flask (25 mL) were added Dess-Martin periodinane (20.35 mg, 48 μmol) and a magnetic stir bar. The reaction mixture was stirred at RT for about 2 hours then quenched with saturated aqueous Na2S2Oa (5 ml) and saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (5 ml), and then extracted with CH2CI2 (2 x 5 ml). The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting crude product was then purified by silica flash column (0.4 cm ID x 3 cm) chromatography using a solvent gradient of 19:1 (5 mL) to 9:1 (5 mL) to 17:3 (5 mL) to 4:1 (10 mL) hexanes/EtOAc to afford XXII-I (6 mg, 19.3 μmol, 60.3% yield). The compound XXII-I was characterized by JH NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 46. MS (ESI), m/z 312 [M+H]+ and 334 [M+Na]+. EXAMPLE 29 SYNTHESIS QF COMPOUND (XVI-I A) VIA (XXII-U BY ENZYMATIC
REDUCTION
Figure imgf000157_0001
XXII-I XVI-IA
[0368] To a solution of XXII-I (6 mg, 19.3 μmol) in DMSO (0.4 mL) obtained from Example 28 in a round bottom flask (25 mL), 600 μL of potassium phosphate buffer (150 mM, pH 6.9), 12 mg of ketoreductase KRED-EXP-BlY, 1.2 mg of glucose dehydrogenase (GDH), 300 μL of glucose (50 mM) and 300 μL of NAD (1 mM) were added. The above reaction mixture was stirred at 37-39 0C for about 40 min and then extracted with EtOAc (2 x 10 mL); the combined organic phase was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. This afforded about 5 mg of XVI-IA. (82.7% yield) as a crude product which was further purified by normal phase HPLC using a Phenomenex Luna lOμ Silica column (25 cm x 21.2 mm ID) using a solvent gradient of 25% to 80% EtOAc/hexanes over 19 min, 80 to 100% EtOAc/hexanes over 1 min, holding at 100% EtOAc for 5 min, at a flow rate of 14.5 mL/min and monitoring the purification by evaporative light scattering detection (ELSD) to afford 2 mg of pure XVI-IA. [α]D -70 ° (c 0.05, CH3CN). The compound XVI-IA was characterized by 1H- NMR (DMSO-d6, 500 MHz) and 13C-NMR (DMSO-(I6, 125 MHz). See Figures 47 and 49. The 1H NMR spectra were in complete agreement with those of an authentic sample of XVMA (Figures 48 and 50 respectively). MS (ESI) m/z 314 [M+H]+. HRESIMS m/z 314.1173 [MH-H]+ (calcd for Ci5H2iClNO4, 314.1159, Δ = 4.5 ppm). EXAMPLE 30
SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND fXXII-D VIA rXVI-lB) (OBTAINED AS A SEMISYNTHETIC DERIVATIVE OF A FERMENTATION PRODUCT OF
Figure imgf000158_0001
XVI lB XXII-I
[0369] To a solution of XVI-IB (75 rng, 0.24 mmol) (obtained as a semisynthetic derivative of XVI-IA, which was obtained by fermentation of Salinospora tropica as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 7,176,232, issued February 13, 2007, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety) in CH2Cl2 (35 mL) in a round bottom flask (150 mL) were added Dess-Martin periodinane (202.5 mg; 0.48 mmol) and a magnetic stir bar. The reaction mixture was stirred at RT for about 3 hours, over which the progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC. The reaction mixture was then quenched with saturated aqueous Na2S2Oa (40 ml) and saturated aqueous NaHCθ3 (40 ml), and extracted with CH2Cl2 (2 x 40 ml). The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated by reduced pressure to afford XXII-I (70 mg, 0.22 mmol, 94% yield). 1H NMR (DMSO-afe, 500 MHz) δ 1.54 (s, 3H), 1.59 (m, 2H), 1.66-1.70 (m, IH)5 1.73-1.80 (m, IH), 1.96 ,(m, 2H), 2.0-2.11 (m, 2H), 3.09 (t, IH, J = 7.0 Hz), 3.63 (brs, IH), 3.83-3.88 (m, IH), 3.89-3.93 (m, IH), 5.50 (dd, IH, J= 2, 10 Hz), 5.92 (dd, IH, J = 2.5, 10 Hz)5 9.70 (s, IH, NH); MS (ESI), m/z 312 [M+H]+ and 334 [M+Na]+. EXAMPLE 31 SYNTHESIS QF COMPOUND (XVI-IA) VIA (XXII-I) BY ENZYMATIC
REDUCTION
Figure imgf000159_0001
[0370] To a solution of XXII-I (50 mg, 0.16 mmol) obtained from Example 30 in DMSO (1 mL) in a round bottom flask (25 mL), 5 mL of potassium phosphate buffer (150 mM, pH 6.9), 100 mg of ketoreductase KRED-EXP-BlY, 10 mg of glucose dehydrogenase (GDH)5 2.5 mL of glucose (50 mM) and 2.5 mL of NAD (1 mM) were added. The above reaction mixture was stirred at 37-39 0C for 40 min and then extracted with EtOAc (2 x 25 mL); the combined organic phase was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a crude product which was crystallized in 1:1 acetone: heptane (6 mL) in a 20 mL scintillation vial (by slow evaporation under nitrogen gas) to afford XVI-IA as white crystalline solid (42 mg, 0.13 mmol, 85% yield). The structure of XVI-IA was confirmed by comparison of its mp, specific rotation and 1H- and 13C-NMR spectra with those of an authentic sample.
EXAMPLE 32 SYNTHESIS OF 2-CYCLOHEXENYL ZINC CHLORIDE
Bu3SnH, Benzene SnBu3 BuLj) ZnC|2
Figure imgf000159_0002
Pd (PPh3)4l 15 min, RT k> THF, -78 0C1 1 hr
Figure imgf000159_0003
[0371J To a solution of 1, 3-cyclohexadiene (0.96 g, 12 mmol, d = 0.84, 1 143 uL) and Pd(PPh3)4 (462.2 mg, 0,4 mmol) in benzene (10 mL) under nitrogen atmosphere, was added BU3S11H (1.16g, 4 mmol, d = 1.098, 1.06 mL) dropwise at room temperature and stirred for 15 minutes. After the solvent was removed on rotavap, the product was purified on silica flash chromatography (column 1.5 cm ID x 20 cm) using a solvent gradient of 10:0 (100 mL) to 19: 1(100 mL) to 9:1 (100 mL) of hexanes/EtOAc to afford cyclohexenyltributyltin (3.5 g, 9.4 mmol, 78.6% yield) as a clear liquid. Cyclohexenyltributyltin was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz). See Figure 51.
[0372] To a solution of cyclohenexyltributyltin (0.92 g, 2.5 mmol) in THF (5 mL) at -78 0C under nitrogen was added nBuLi (1 mL, 2.5 M solution in hexane, 2.5 mmol). After an additional 30 min stirring, ZnCl2 (340 mg, 2.5 mmol, dissolved in 2 ml of THF) was added and stirring was continued for 30 min at -78 0C to afford 2- cyclohexenyl zinc chloride.
EXAMPLE 33 SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND X-L
Figure imgf000160_0001
IX l8 X-I8
[0373] To a solution of IX-la (30 mg, 0.08 mmol) in 5 mL of THF at -78 0C3 1 mL of cyclohexenyl zinc chloride (freshly prepared; Example 32) was added and stirred at -78 0C for about 3 hrs. The reaction was quenched with H2O (15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 15 mL). The combined organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield the crude product which was purified by silica flash chromatography (column 2.5 cm ID x 6 cm) using a solvent gradient of 19:1 (50 mL) to 9:1 (50 mL) to 17:3 (50 mL) to 8:2 (50 mL) to 7:3 (50 mL) of hexanes/EtOAc to afford pure cyclohexene derivative X-I8 (26 mg, 0.057 mmol, 71.4% yield). The compound X-I8 was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz), and 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz). See Figures 52 and 53. MS (ESI) m/z 456.3 [MH]+ and 478.3 [M+Na]+. EXAMPLE 34 . SYNTHESIS OF COMPOUND X-Ib
Figure imgf000161_0001
[0374] To a solution of IX-lb (35 mg, 0.094 mmol) in 5 mL of THF at -78 0C, 1.2 mL of cyclohexenyl zinc chloride (freshly prepared; Example 32) was added and stirred at -78 0C for about 3 hrs. The reaction was quenched with H2O (15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 20 mL). The combined organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield a liquid residue. This residue was dissolved in 5 mL of hexanes and allowed to stand for an hour. A white solid was precipitated from the residue, which was separated by decanting the solvent. The solid material was further washed with hexanes (2 x 2 mL) and dried on high-vacuum to afford pure X-Ib (32 mg, 0.066 mmol, 75% yield). The compound X-Ib was characterized by 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz), and 13C-NMR (CDCl3, 125 MHz). See Figures 54 and 55. MS (ESI) m/z 456.3 [M+H]+ and 478.3 [M+Na]+. The stereochemistry was determined by X-ray crystallography (See Figure 56).
EXAMPLE 35
IN VITRO INHIBITION OF 2OS PROTEASOME ACTIVITY BY COMPOUND XVI- IA OBTAINED FROM SYNTHETIC AND FERMENTATION SOURCES
[0375] The compound XVI-IA as obtained synthetically using a method described herein and by fermentation as described in U.S. Patent No. 7,144,723, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Both the synthetic and fermentation compounds XVI-IA were prepared as 20 mM stock solution in DMSO and stored in small aliquots at -8O0C. Purified rabbit muscle 2OS proteasome was obtained from Boston Biochem (Cambridge, MA). To enhance the chymotrypsin-like activity of the proteasome, the assay buffer (20 mM HEPES, pH7.3, 0.5 mM EDTA, and 0.05% Triton XlOO) was supplemented with SDS resulting in a final SDS concentration of 0.035%. The substrate used was suc-LLVY-AMC, a fluorogenic peptide substrate specifically cleaved by the chymotrypsin-like activity of the proteasome. Assays were performed at a proteasome concentration of 1 μg/ml in a final volume of 200μl in 96-weII Costar microtiter plates. Both the synthetic and fermentation compounds XVI-IA were tested as eight-point dose response curves with final concentrations ranging from 500 nM to 158 pM. After addition of test compounds to the rabbit 2OS proteasomes, the samples were preincubated at 370C for five minutes in a temperature controlled Fluoroskan Ascent 96- well microplate reader (Thermo Electron, Waltham, MA). During this preincubation step, the substrate was diluted 25-fold in SDS-containing assay buffer. After the preincubation period, the reactions were initiated by the addition of 10 μl of the diluted substrate and the plates were returned to the plate reader. The final concentration of substrate in the reactions was 20 μM. Fluorescence of the cleaved peptide substrate was measured at λex=390 nm and λem=460 nm. All data were collected every five minutes for 2 hour and plotted as the mean of duplicate data points. The IC50 values (the drug concentration at which 50% of the maximal relative fluorescence is inhibited) were calculated by Prism (GraphPad Software) using a sigmoidal dose-response, variable slope model. To evaluate the activity of the compounds against the caspase-like activity of the 2OS proteasome, reactions were performed as described above except that Z-LLE-AMC was used as the peptide substrate. Both the synthetic and fermentation compounds XVI-IA were tested at concentrations ranging from 5 μM to 1.6 nM. For the evaluation of these compounds against the trypsin-like activity of the 2OS proteasome, the SDS was omitted from the assay buffer and Boc-LRR-AMC was used as the peptide substrate. The concentration of the test compounds used in these assays ranged from 500 nM to 158 pM.
[0376] Results (IC50 values) shown in Table 4 and in Figures 57-59 illustrate that both synthetic and fermentation compounds XVI-lA_have similar inhibitory activity against the chymotrypsin-like, trypsin-like and caspase-like activities of the 2OS proteasome in vitro. TABLE 4: IN VITRO INHIBITION OF PURIFIED RABBIT 2OS PROTEASOMES BY THE SYNTHETIC AND FERMENTATION COMPOUNDS OF FORMULA XVI-IA
Figure imgf000163_0001
EXAMPLE 36
EFFECTS ON THE CHYMOTRYPSIN-LIKE ACTIVITY OF PROTEASOMES IN
RPMI 8226 CELLS BY COMPOUNDS XVI-IA OBTAINED FROM
SYNTHETICALLY AND FROM FERMENTATION
[0377] RPMI 8226 (ATCC5 CCL-155), the human multiple myeloma cell line, was cultured in RPMI 1640 medium supplemented with 2 mM L-Glutamine, 1% Penicillin/Streptomycin, 10 mM HEPES and 10% Fetal Bovine Serum at 370C, 5% CO2 and 95% humidified air. To evaluate the inhibitory effects on the chymotrypsin-like activity of the 2OS proteasome, test compounds prepared in DMSO were appropriately diluted in culture medium and added to lxlO6/ml RMPI 8226 cells at final concentration of 1, 5 or 10 nM. DMSO was used as the vehicle control at a final concentration of 0.1%. Following 1 hr incubation of RMPI 8226 cells with the compounds, the cells were pelleted by centrifugation at 2,000 rpm for 10 sec at room temperature and washed 3X with ice-cold IX Dubach's Phosphate-Buffered Saline (DPBS, Mediatech, Herndon, VA). DPBS washed cells were lysed on ice for 15 min in lysis buffer (20 mM HEPES5 0.5 mM EDTA5 0.05% Triton X-100, pH 7.3) supplemented with protease inhibitor cocktail (Roche Diagnostics, Indianapolis, IN). Cell debris was pelleted by centrifugation at 14,000 rpm for 10 min, 40C and supernatants (=cell lysates) were transferred to a new tube. Protein concentration was determined by the BCA protein assay kit (Pierce Biotechnology, Rockford, IL). The chymotrypsin-like activity of the 2OS proteasome in the RPMI 8226 cell lysates was measured by using the Suc-LLVY-AMC fluorogenic peptide substrate in the proteasome assay buffer (20 mM HEPES, 0.5 mM EDTA5 pH 8.0) containing a final concentration of 0.035% SDS. The reactions were initiated by the addition of 10 μL of 0.4 mM Suc-LLVY-AMC (prepared by diluting a 10 mM solution of the peptide in DMSO 1 :25 with assay buffer) to 190 μL of the cell lysates in 96-well Costar microtiter plate and incubated in the Thermo Lab Systems Fluoroskan plate reader at 370C. Fluorescence of the cleaved peptide substrate was measured at λex=390 nm and λem=460 nm. All data were collected every five minutes for 2 hour. The total protein used for each assay was 20 μg. The final concentration of Suc-LL VY-AMC and DMSO was 20 μM and 0.2%, respectively. After subtraction of the background (the values from wells containing buffer and substrate in the absence of cell lysate), the activity of test compound was expressed as % inhibition as normalized to the proteasome activity observed in the DMSO treated control cells.
[0378] Results in Table 5 show that exposure of RPMI 8226 cells to the fermentation or synthetic compounds XVI-lA_resulted in a dose-dependent inhibition of the 2OS proteasome chymotrypsin-like activity. In addition, a similar inhibition profile was observed when cells were exposed to compound XVI-I A_obtained via fermentation or to compound XVI-IA obtained synthetically.
TABLE 5: INHIBITION OF THE CHYMOTRYPSIN-LIKE ACTIVITY OF PROTEASOME IN RPMI 8826 CELLS BY SYNTHETIC AND FERMENTATION COMPOUNDS XVI-IA
Figure imgf000164_0001
[0379] The examples described above are set forth solely to assist in the understanding of the embodiments. Thus, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the methods may provide derivatives of compounds.
[0380] One skilled in the art would readily appreciate that the present invention is well adapted to carry out the objects and obtain the ends and advantages mentioned, as well as those inherent therein. The methods and procedures described herein are presently representative of preferred embodiments and are exemplary and are not intended as limitations on the scope of the invention. Changes therein and other uses will occur to those skilled in the art which are encompassed within the spirit of the invention.
[0381] It will be readily apparent to one skilled in the art that varying substitutions and modifications can be made to the embodiments disclosed herein without departing from the scope and spirit of the invention.
[0382] All patents and publications mentioned in the specification are indicative of the levels of those skilled in the art to which the invention pertains. AU patents and publications are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
[0383] The invention illustratively described herein suitably can be practiced in the absence of any element or elements, limitation or limitations which is not specifically disclosed herein. The terms and expressions which have been employed are used as terms of description and not of limitation, and there is no intention that in the use of such terms and expressions indicates the exclusion of equivalents of the features shown and described or portions thereof. It is recognized that various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention. Thus, it should be understood that although the present invention has been specifically disclosed by preferred embodiments and optional features, modification and variation of the concepts herein disclosed can be resorted to by those skilled in the art, and that such modifications and variations are considered to be falling within the scope of the embodiments of the invention.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A method of chemical synthesis comprising the steps of: (a) reacting a compound of formula (I):
Figure imgf000166_0001
with a compound of formula (II):
Figure imgf000166_0002
(II) to form a compound of formula (III):
Figure imgf000166_0003
(b) deprotecting the compound of formula (III) to form a compound of formula (IV):
Figure imgf000166_0004
(c) performing an intramolecular aldol reaction on the compound of formula (IV) to form a compound of formula (V):
Figure imgf000167_0001
(d) cleaving the carbon-carbon double bond of the compound of formula (V) and cyclizing the cleaved double bond with the tertiary hydroxy group to form a compound of formula (VI):
Figure imgf000167_0002
(e) protecting the hemiacetal of the compound of formula (VI) to form a compound of formula (VII):
Figure imgf000167_0003
(f) reducing the COOR2 group of the compound of formula (VII) to an alcohol to form a compound of formula (VIII); W
Figure imgf000168_0001
(g) oxidizing the alcohol of the compound of formula (VIII) to form a compound of formula (IX):
Figure imgf000168_0002
(h) adding R4 to the compound of formula (IX) by reacting the compound of formula (IX) with an organometallic moiety containing at least one R4 to form a compound of formula (X):
Figure imgf000168_0003
(i) removing PGi on the compound of formula (X) and reductively opening the hemiacetal of the compound of formula (X) to form a compound of formula (XXIII):
Figure imgf000169_0001
(XXIII)
(j) protecting the primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XXIII) to form a compound of formula (XXIV):
Figure imgf000169_0002
(k) cleaving the aminal group of the compound of formula (XXIV) to form a compound of formula (XXV):
Figure imgf000169_0003
(1) protecting the secondary alcohol of the compound of formula (XXV) to form a compound of formula (XXVp):
Figure imgf000170_0001
(m) converting the primary alcohol group and removing the PG2 protecting group moiety on the secondary alcohol of the compound of formula (XXVp) to form a compound of formula (XXVI):
Figure imgf000170_0002
(n) removing the PG3 protecting group moiety on the primary alcohol of the compound of formula (XXVI) to form a compound of formula (XXVII):
Figure imgf000170_0003
(XXVII)
(o) protecting the primary alcohol of the compound of formula (XXVII) with the PG3 protecting group moiety to form a compound of formula (XXVI), wherein the PG3 can be same or different from the PG3 in step (m):
Figure imgf000171_0001
(p) performing a lactonization reaction on the compound of formula (XXVI) to form a compound of formula (XXVIII):
Figure imgf000171_0002
(xxvill)
(q) removing the PG3 protecting group moiety on the compound of formula (XXVIII) to form a compound of formula (XV):
Figure imgf000171_0003
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted C)-6 alkyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-6 alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alky], C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2.6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C]2 cycloalkynyl, C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalky], sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of — CC=O)OR6, -CC=O)SR6, - C(=O)NR6R6 and -C(=O)Z; each R6 can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci- C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafϊuorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl;
RA and RB are each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cu6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein RA and RB can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl;
Y is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is a halogen; and
PGi and PG3 are each a protecting group moiety.
2. The method of Claim I3 further comprising substituting the primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV) to form a compound of formula CXVI), wherein the compound of formula (XVI) has the following structure:
Figure imgf000173_0001
wherein X is a halogen.
3. The method of Claim 1, further comprising substituting the primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV) to form a compound of formula (XVI-B), wherein the compound of formula (XVI-B) has the following structure:
Figure imgf000173_0002
wherein X is a halogen.
4. The method of Claim 3, further comprising the steps of: (1) oxidizing the secondary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XVI-B) wherein the compound of formula (XVI-B) has the following structure:
Figure imgf000173_0003
to form a compound of formula (XXII):
Figure imgf000174_0001
(2) reducing the keto group of the compound of formula (XXII) to form a compound of formula (XVI-A)5 wherein the compound of formula (XVI-A) has the following structure::
Figure imgf000174_0002
5. The method of Claim 3, further comprising the step of:
(1) inverting the stereochemistry of the secondary hydroxy carbon center of the compound of formula (XVI-B), wherein the compound of formula (XVI-B) has the following structure:
Figure imgf000174_0003
to form a compound of formula (XVI-A), wherein the compound of formula (XVI-A) has the following structure:
Figure imgf000175_0001
6. The method Claim 1, wherein PGj and PG2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of benzyl, a substituted benzyl, an alkylcarbonyl, an arylalkylcarbonyl, a substituted methyl ether, a substituted ethyl ether, a substituted benzyl ether, a tetrahydropyranyl ether, a silyl ether, an ester, and a carbonate.
7. The method Claim 1, wherein the organometallic moiety is selected form the group consisting of an organomagnesium compound, an organolithium compound, an organotin compound, an organocuprates compound, organozinc compound, organoboron compound, and an organopalladiurn compound, a metal carbonyl, a metallocene, a carbine complex, and an organometalloid.
8. The of method Claim 1, wherein: the organometallic moiety is selected from the group consisting of R4-
Figure imgf000175_0002
R7 is selected from the group consisting of halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, isopinocampheyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, and carbonyl alkoxy, wherein if more than one R7 is present, the R7 groups can optionally be bond together to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroalkyl or heteroalkenyl ring; p is an integer from 1 to 3; and q is an integer from 1 to 4.
9. The method of Claim 1 wherein R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl.
10. The method of Claim 1 wherein R3 is methyl.
11. The method of Claim 1 wherein R5 is -C(=O)OR6; and Rg is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C24 alkyl.
12. The method of Claim 1 wherein R5 is -C(=O)Z; and Z is a halogen.
13. A method of forming a compound of formula (X) from a compound of formula (V) comprising the steps of: cleaving the carbon-carbon double bond of the compound of formula (V) and cyclizing the cleaved double bond with the tertiary hydroxy group; transforming — COOR2 to an aldehyde, wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cι-6 alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and adding R4 to the aldehyde using an organometallic moiety containing at least one R4, wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C)-Cn alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-Q2 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyelyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminόalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxy alkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl..
14. A method of forming a compound of formula (XV) from a compound of formula (X) comprising the steps of: cleaving an aminal group; removing PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, wherein PGi is a protecting group moiety; and forming a four membered lactone ring.
15. The method of Claim 14, wherein the cleaving of the aminal group is before the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, and before the formation of the four membered lactone ring.
16. The method of Claim 14, wherein the cleaving of the aminal group is after the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, but before the formation of the four membered ring.
17. A method of forming a compound of formula (XVII) from a compound of formula (V) comprising the steps of: cleaving the carbon-carbon double bond of the compound of formula (V) and cyclizing the cleaved double bond with the tertiary hydroxy group; and adding R4 after cyclization with the tertiary hydroxy group using an organometallic moiety containing at least one R4, wherein wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-Ci2 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-Cj2 alkynyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonyl alkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl.
18. A method of forming a compound of formula (XXII) from a compound of formula (XVII) comprising the steps of: cleaving an aminal group; removing PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, wherein PGj is a protecting group moiety; forming a four membered ring via a lactonization reaction; and removing any protecting groups on a ketone.
19. The method of Claim 18, wherein the cleaving of the aminal group is before the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, and before the formation of the four membered ring via a lactonization reaction.
20. The method of Claim 18, wherein the cleaving of the aminal group is after the removal of PGi and reductively opening the hemiacetal, but before the formation of the four membered ring via a lactonization reaction.
21. A method for preparing a compound of formula (III) comprising the steps of: reacting a compound of formula (I):
Figure imgf000178_0001
with a compound of formula (II):
Figure imgf000178_0002
to form a compound of formula (III):
Figure imgf000178_0003
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Cue alkyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
Y is oxygen or sulfur; and
RA and RB are each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein RA and RB can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl. 22. The method of Claim 21 , wherein: the compound of formula (I) has the structure:
Figure imgf000179_0001
the compound of formula (II) has the structure:
Figure imgf000179_0002
the compound of formula (III) has the structure:
Figure imgf000179_0003
23. The method of Claim 21, wherein: the compound of formula (I) has the structure:
Figure imgf000179_0004
the compound of formula (II) has the structure:
Figure imgf000180_0001
the compound of formula (III) has the structure:
Figure imgf000180_0002
24. A method of preparing a compound of formula (IV) comprising deprotecting the compound of formula (III) to form a compound of formula (IV):
Figure imgf000180_0003
(in) (IV) wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl;
R.2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-6 alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
Y is oxygen or sulfur; and
RA and RB are each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following:
Figure imgf000180_0004
alkyl, C2.6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein RA and RB can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl. W
25. The method of Claim 24, wherein: the compound of formula (III) has the structure:
Figure imgf000181_0001
the compound of formula (IV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000181_0002
26. The method of Claim 24 wherein: the compound of formula (III) has the structure:
Figure imgf000181_0003
the compound of formula (IV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000181_0004
27. A method for preparing a compound of formula (V) comprising performing an intramolecular aldol reaction on the compound of formula (IV) to form a compound of formula (V):
Figure imgf000182_0001
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted C [-6 alkyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-6 alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl. 28. The method of Claim 27, wherein: the compound of formula (IV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000182_0002
the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
Figure imgf000182_0003
29. The method of Claim 27, wherein: the compound of formula (IV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000183_0001
the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
30. The method of Claim 27, wherein: the compound of formula (IV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000183_0003
the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
Figure imgf000183_0004
31. The method of Claim 27, wherein: the compound of formula (IV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000184_0001
the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
Figure imgf000184_0002
32. A method of preparing a compound of formula (VI) comprising cleaving the double bond of the compound of formula (V) and cyclizing the cleaved double bond with the tertiary hydroxy group to form a compound of formula (VI):
Figure imgf000184_0003
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci ^ alky];
R.2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci_6alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl. 33. The method of Claim 32, wherein: the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
Figure imgf000185_0001
the compound of formula (VI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000185_0002
34. The method of Claim 32, wherein: the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
Figure imgf000185_0003
the compound of formula (VI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000185_0004
35. A method of preparing a compound of formula (VII) comprising protecting the hydroxy substituent attached to the oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring of the compound of formula (VI) to form a compound of formula (VII):
Figure imgf000186_0001
(VI) (VII) wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted C^ alkyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj.6 alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1.6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, €3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
PGi is a protecting group moiety. 36. The method of Claim 35, wherein: the compound of formula (VI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000186_0002
the compound of formula (VII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000186_0003
37. The method of Claim 35, wherein: the compound of formula (VI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000187_0001
the compound of formula (VII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000187_0002
38. A method of preparing a compound of formula (VIII) comprising reducing the COOR.2 group of the compound of formula (VII) to an alcohol to form a compound of formula (VIII):
Figure imgf000187_0003
(VII) (VIII) wherein:
R] is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Cj.6 alkyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-β alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-^ alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
PGi is a protecting group moiety.
39. The method of Claim 38, wherein the compound of formula (VII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000188_0001
the compound of formula (VIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000188_0002
40. The method of Claim 38, wherein the compound of formula (VII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000188_0003
the compound of formula (VHI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000188_0004
41. A method of preparing a compound of formula (IX) comprising oxidizing the alcohol group of the compound of formula (VIII) to an aldehyde to form a compound of formula (IX):
Figure imgf000189_0001
(VIII) (IX) wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted
Figure imgf000189_0002
alkyl;
R-3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-^ alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
PGi is a protecting group moiety. 42. The method of Claim 41 , wherein the compound of formula (VIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000189_0003
the compound of formula (IX) has the structure:
Figure imgf000189_0004
43. The method of Claim 41, wherein the compound of formula (VIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000190_0001
the compound of formula (IX) has the structure:
Figure imgf000190_0002
44. A method of preparing a compound of formula (X) comprising adding R4 to the compound of formula (IX) by reacting the compound of formula (IX) with an organometallic moiety containing at least one ILtto form a compound of formula (X):
Figure imgf000190_0003
(IX) (X) wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C(.6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C)2 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalky], aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalky), alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and PGi is a protecting group moiety.
45. The method of Claim 44, wherein the organometallic moiety is 9- cyclohex-2-enyl-9-borabi cyclo [3.3.1 ]nonane.
46. The method of Claim 44, wherein the compound of formula (IX) has the structure:
Figure imgf000191_0001
the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000191_0002
47. The method of Claim 44, wherein the compound of formula (IX) has the structure:
Figure imgf000192_0001
the compound of foπnula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000192_0002
48. The method of Claim 44, wherein the compound of formula (IX) has the structure:
Figure imgf000192_0003
the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000192_0004
49. The method of Claim 44, wherein the compound of formula (IX) has the structure:
Figure imgf000193_0001
the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000193_0002
50. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XXIII) comprising removing the protecting group moiety on the compound of formula (X) and reductively opening the hemiacetal to form a compound of formula (XXIII):
Figure imgf000193_0003
(X) (XXIII) wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Cj-6 alkyl;
R.3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkynyl, C3-Ci2 heterocycly], aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridiπylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PGi is a protecting group moiety. 51. The method of Claim 50, wherein the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000194_0001
the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000194_0002
(XXIII-A).
52. The method of Cl aim 50, wherein the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000195_0001
the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000195_0002
(XXIII-B).
53. The method of Claim 50, wherein the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000195_0003
the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000195_0004
(XXIII- IA).
54. The method of Claim 50, wherein the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000196_0001
the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000196_0002
(XXIII-IB).
55. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XXIV) comprising protecting the primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XXIII) to form a compound of formula (XXIV):
Figure imgf000196_0003
(XXIII) (XXIV) wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted C)-6 alkyl; R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; R^ can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyl oxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoaikyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PG3 is a protecting group moiety. 56. The method of Claim 55, wherein the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000197_0001
(XXIII-A) the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000198_0001
(XXIV-A).
57. The method of Claim 55, wherein the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000198_0002
(XXIII-B) the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000198_0003
(XXIV-B).
58. The method of Claim 55, wherein the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000198_0004
(XXIII-IA) me compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000199_0001
59. The method of Claim 55, wherein the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000199_0002
(XXIII-IB) the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000199_0003
60. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XXV) comprising cleaving the aminal group of the compound of formula (XXIV) to form a compound of formula (XXV):
Figure imgf000200_0001
(XXIV) (XXV) wherein:
Ri is a hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-β alkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-O alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: CJ-CI2 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl. alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfϊnylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PG3 is a protecting group moiety. 61. The method of Claim 60, wherein the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000201_0001
the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000201_0002
62. The method of Claim 60, wherein the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000201_0003
the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
63. The method
Figure imgf000201_0004
the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000202_0001
the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000202_0002
64. The method of Claim 60, wherein the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000202_0003
the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000203_0001
65. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XXVp) comprising protecting the secondary alcohol of the compound of formula (XXV) to form a compound of formula (XXVp):
Figure imgf000203_0002
(XXV) (XXVp) wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: d-β alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-Cj2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbony], azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PG2 and PG3 are protecting group moieties. 66. The method of Claim 65, wherein the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000204_0001
the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000204_0002
67. The method of Claim 65, wherein the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000204_0003
the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
68. The method
Figure imgf000205_0001
the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000205_0002
the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000205_0003
69. The method of Claim 65, wherein the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000206_0001
the compound of formula (XX Vp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000206_0002
70. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XXVI) comprising converting the primary alcohol group and removing the PG2 protecting group moiety on the secondary alcohol of the compound of formula (XXVp) to form a compound of formula (XXVI):
Figure imgf000206_0003
wherein: Ra is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-6 alkyl, C3..6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl., salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of — C(=O)ORfi, -C(=O)SR6, - CC=O)NR6R6 and -C(=O)Z;. each R^ can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci- C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl;
Z can be a halogen; and
PG2 and PG3 are protecting group moieties. 71. The method of Claim 70, wherein the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000208_0001
the compound of formula QCXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000208_0002
72. The method of Claim 7O9 wherein the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000208_0003
the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000208_0004
73. The method of Claim 70, wherein the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000209_0001
the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000209_0002
(XXVMA). The method of Claim 70, wherein the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000209_0003
the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000210_0001
75. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XXVII) comprising removing the PG3 protecting group moiety on the primary alcohol of the compound of formula (XXVI) to form a compound of formula (XXVII):
Figure imgf000210_0002
(XXVI) (XXVII) wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl. C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyJ, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl., salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, gυanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alky'I, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of -C(=O)ORδ, -CC=O)SR6, - CC=O)NR6R6 and -C(=O)Z; each R6 can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci- C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl;
Z can be a halogen; and
PG3 is protecting group moiety.
76. The method of Claim 75, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000211_0001
the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000211_0002
(XXVII-A). 77. The method of Claim 75, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000212_0001
the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000212_0002
(XXVII-B). The method of Claim 75, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000212_0003
the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000213_0001
(XXVII-IA). 79. The method of Claim 75, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000213_0002
the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000213_0003
(XXVII-IB).
80. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XXVI) comprising protecting the primary alcohol of the compound of formula (XXVII) with the PG3 protecting group moiety to form a compound of formula (XXVI)5 wherein the PG3 can be same or different from the PG3 in Claim 57:
Figure imgf000214_0001
(XXVII) (XXVI) wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-Ci2 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, Ca-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyano alkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of -C(=O)OR6, -C(K))SR6, - C(K))NR6R6 and -C(K))Z; each R6 can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Q- C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafJuoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl;
Z can be a halogen; and
PG3 is protecting group moiety. 81. The method of Claim 80, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000215_0001
(XXVII-A) the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000215_0002
82. The method of Claim 80, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000215_0003
(XXVII-B) the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000216_0001
83. The method of Claim 80, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000216_0002
(XXVII-IA) the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000216_0003
84. The method of Claim 80, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure;
Figure imgf000217_0001
(XXVII- IB) the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000217_0002
85. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XXVIII) comprising performing a lactonization reaction on the compound of formula (XXVI) to form a compound of formula (XXVIII):
Figure imgf000217_0003
(XXVI) (XXVIII) wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C)-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3..6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-Cu alkyl, C2-Cj2 alkenyl, C2-Ct2 alkynyl, C3-Q2 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkyl aminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfϊnylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkylj salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a suifooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl;
Rs is selected from the group consisting of -C(=O)OR6, -CC=O)SR6, - CC=O)NR6R6 and -C(=O)Z; each R6 can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci- C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl;
Z can be a halogen; and
PG3 is protecting group moiety. 86. The method of Claim 85, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000218_0001
the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000219_0001
(XXVIII-A).
87. The method of Claim 85, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000219_0002
the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000219_0003
(xxviII-B). 88. The method of Claim 85, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000219_0004
the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000220_0001
(XXVIII-IA). 89. The method of Claim 85, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000220_0002
the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000220_0003
(XXVIII-IB).
90. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XV) comprising performing a lactonization reaction on the compound of formula (XXVII) to form a compound of formula (XV):
Figure imgf000221_0001
(XXVII) wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-O alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C]2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbony], azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of -C(^O)OR6, -CO=O)SR6, - C(^O)NR6R6 and -C(=O)Z; each R6 can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci- C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifiuoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl; Z can be a halogen; and with the proviso that the compound of formula (XXVII) and the compound of formula (XV) cannot have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000222_0001
where R5 -C(=O)OR6; and R6 is hydrogen, methyl or t-butyl.
91. The method of Claim 90, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000222_0002
(XXVII-A) the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000222_0003
with the proviso that Rs cannot be
Figure imgf000222_0004
wherein Re is hydrogen, methyl or t-butyl; when R4 is 2-cycIohexenyl and R3 is methyl. 92. The method of Claim 90, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000223_0001
(XXVII-B) the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
93. The method of
Figure imgf000223_0002
the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000223_0003
(XXVII-IA) the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000224_0001
with the proviso R5 is not -CC=O)OR6, wherein Re is hydrogen, methyl or t-butyl. 94. The method of Claim 90, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000224_0002
(XXVII-IB) the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000224_0003
95. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XV) comprising removing the PG3 protecting group moiety on the compound of formula (XXVIII) to form a compound of formula (XV):
Figure imgf000225_0001
(XXVIII) (XV) wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cj-Ci2 alkyl, C2-Cj2 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-Cj2 cycloalkyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PG3 is a protecting group moiety. 96. The method of Claim 95, wherein the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000226_0001
(XXVIII _A) the compound of formula (XV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000226_0002
97. The method of Claim 95, wherein the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
(XXVIII -B) the compound of formula (XV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000226_0004
98. The method of Claim 95, wherein the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000227_0001
(XXVHI -IA) the compound of formula (XV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000227_0002
The method of Claim 95, wherein the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000227_0003
(XXVIII -IB) the compound of formula (XV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000228_0001
100. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XVI) comprising substituting the primary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XV) to form a compound of formula (XVI):
Figure imgf000228_0002
wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, 63.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-Cu alkynyl, C3-C]2 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-Cn heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfmylalkyl. thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and with the proviso that the compound of formula (XV) and the compound of formula (XVI) cannot have the following structures and stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000229_0001
(XV) (XVI) where R3 is methyl; R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl; and X is chlorine;
101. The method of Claim 100, wherein the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000229_0002
the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000230_0001
with the proviso that if R3 is methyl and X is chlorine, then R4 cannot be 2- cyclohexenyl. 102. The method of Claim 100, wherein the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000230_0002
the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000230_0003
103. The method of Claim 100, wherein the compound of formula (XV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000231_0001
the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000231_0002
104. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XXII) comprising oxidizing the alcohol group attached to the C-5 carbon adjacent to R4 of a compound of formula (XVI) to a. ketone to form a compound of formula (XXII):
Figure imgf000231_0003
wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-CJ2 cycloalkenyl, Cβ-Cπ cycloalkynyl, C3-C)2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyls acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthio alkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
X is a halogen. 105. The method of Claim 104, wherein the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000232_0001
the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000233_0001
106. The method of Claim 104, wherein the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000233_0002
the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000233_0003
107. The method of Claim 104, wherein the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000234_0001
the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000234_0002
The method of Claim 104, wherein the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000234_0003
the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000235_0001
109. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XVI) comprising reducing the ketone attached to the carbon adjacent to R4 of a compound of formula (XXII) to an alcohol to form a heterocyclic compound of formula (XVI):
Figure imgf000235_0002
(XXII) (XVI) wherein:
R-3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl. thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and X is a halogen.
110. The method of Claim 109, wherein the reducing comprises using an enzyme or NaBH4 as a reducing agent.
111. The method of Claim 110, wherein the enzyme is selected from the group consisting of KRED-EXP-Bl Y and KRED-EXP-ClA.
112. The method of Claim 109, wherein the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000236_0001
the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000236_0002
113. The method of Claim 109, wherein the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000237_0001
the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000237_0002
The method of Claim 109, wherein the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000237_0003
the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000238_0001
15. The method of Claim 109, wherein the compound of formula (XXII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000238_0002
the compound of formula (XVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000238_0003
116. A method of preparing a compound of formula (XVI-A) comprising inverting the stereochemistry of the secondary hydroxy group of the compound of formula (XVI-B) to form a heterocyclic compound of formula (XVI-A):
Figure imgf000239_0001
wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkyl, Ca-Ci2 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl alkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
X is a halogen. 117. The method of Claim 116, wherein the compound of formula (XVI-B) has the structure:
Figure imgf000240_0001
the compound of formula (XVI-A) has the structure:
Figure imgf000240_0002
118. A compound of formula (III):
Figure imgf000240_0003
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl;
R.2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci.β alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R.3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: CL6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
Y is oxygen or sulfur; and RA and RB are each independently selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-O alkynyl, wherein RA and RB can be optionally bound together to form an optionally substituted 5, 6, 7, or 8 membered heterocyclyl.
119. The compound of Claim 118, wherein the compound of formula (III) has the structure:
Figure imgf000241_0001
120. The compound of Claim 118, wherein the compound of formula (III) has the structure:
Figure imgf000241_0002
121. A compound of formula (IV) :
Figure imgf000241_0003
wherein:
R1 is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci.6 alkyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, a C3-6 cycloalkyl, a C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl.
122. The compound of Claim 121, wherein the compound of formula (IV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000242_0001
123. The compound of Claim 121, wherein the compound of formula (IV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000242_0002
wherein:
R) is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C]-6 alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cι-e alkyl, a C3-6 cycloalkyl, a C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl.
125. The compound of Claim 124, wherein the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
Figure imgf000243_0001
126. The compound of Claim 124, wherein the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
Figure imgf000243_0002
127. The compound of Claim 124, wherein the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
Figure imgf000243_0003
128. The compound of Claim 124, wherein the compound of formula (V) has the structure:
Figure imgf000244_0001
129. A compound of formula (VI):
Figure imgf000244_0002
wherein:
R1 is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following:
Figure imgf000244_0003
alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Q .6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-O alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl.
130. The compound of Claim 129, wherein the compound of formula (VI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000244_0004
131. The compound of Claim 129, wherein the compound of formula (VI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000245_0001
132. A compound of formula (VII):
Figure imgf000245_0002
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
PGi is a protecting group moiety.
133. The compound of Claim 132, wherein the compound of formula (VII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000245_0003
134. The compound of Claim 132, wherein the compound of formula (VII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000246_0001
135. A compound of formula (VIII):
Figure imgf000246_0002
wherein:
R] is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl; R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2.6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; and
PGi is a protecting group moiety.
136. The compound of Claim 135, wherein the compound of formula (VIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000246_0003
137. The compound of Claim 135, wherein the compound of formula (VIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000247_0001
138. A compound of formula (IX)
Figure imgf000247_0002
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted C1^ alkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C].6 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl. and arylalkyl; and
PGi is a protecting group moiety.
139. The compound of Claim 138, wherein the compound of formula (IX) has the structure:
Figure imgf000247_0003
140. The compound of Claim 138, wherein the compound of formula (IX) has the structure:
Figure imgf000248_0001
141. A compound of formula (X):
Figure imgf000248_0002
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Cue alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphoryl alkyl, (alkylphosρhoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PGi is a protecting group moiety.
142. The compound of Claim 141, wherein the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000249_0001
143. The compound of Claim 141, wherein the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000249_0002
144. The compound of Claim 141, wherein the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000249_0003
145. The compound of Claim 141, wherein the compound of formula (X) has the structure:
Figure imgf000250_0001
146. A compound of formula (XXIII):
Figure imgf000250_0002
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted
Figure imgf000250_0003
alkyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-^ alkyl, C3-^ cycloalkyl, Ca-β alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Cj2 alkenyl, C2-Cj2 alkynyl, C3-C)2 cycloalkyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PG1 is a protecting group moiety.
147. The compound of Claim 146, wherein the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000251_0001
(XXIII-A).
148. The compound of Claim 146, wherein the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000251_0002
(XXIII-B).
149. The compound of Claim 146, wherein the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000251_0003
(XXIII- IA).
150. The compound of Claim 146, wherein the compound of formula (XXIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000252_0001
(XXIII- IB).
151. A compound of formula (XXIV):
Figure imgf000252_0002
wherein:
Ri is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl;
R.3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-O alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C]-C]2 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-Cu cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfmylalkyl, alkoxysulfmylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyi, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PG3 is a protecting group moiety.
152. • The compound of Claim 151, wherein the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000253_0001
153. The compound of Claim 151, wherein the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000253_0002
154. The compound of Claim 151, wherein the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000254_0001
155. The compound of Claim 151, wherein the compound of formula (XXIV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000254_0002
156. A compound of formula (XXV):
Figure imgf000254_0003
wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Cj2 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, Cj-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyl oxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinyl alkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PG3 is a protecting group moiety.
157. The compound of Claim 156, wherein the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000255_0001
158. The compound of Claim 156, wherein the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000256_0001
159. The compound of Claim 156, wherein the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000256_0002
160. The compound of Claim 156, wherein the compound of formula (XXV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000256_0003
161. A compound of formula (XXVp) :
Figure imgf000257_0001
wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-O alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an arninoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfϊnylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidino alkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxy alkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and
PG2 and PG3 are protecting group moieties.
162. The compound of Claim 161, wherein the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000258_0001
163. The compound of Claim 161, wherein the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000258_0002
164. The compound of Claim 161, wherein the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000258_0003
165. The compound of Claim 161, wherein the compound of formula (XXVp) has the structure:
Figure imgf000259_0001
166. A compound of formula (XXVI):
wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2.& alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C]-C]2 alkyl, C2-Q2 alkenyl, C2-Q2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-C12 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl;
R.5 is selected from the group consisting of -CC=O)OR6, -CC=O)SR6, - CC=O)NR6R6 and -C(=O)Z; each Re can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci- C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl, pentafluorophenyl, pentafiuoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl;
Z can be a halogen; and
PG3 is a protecting group moiety.
167. The compound of Claim 166, wherein the PG3 protecting group moiety is selected from the group consisting of benzoyl, TBS, and TES.
168. The compound of Claim 166, wherein the compound of formula CXXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000260_0001
169. The compound of Claim 166, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000260_0002
170. The compound of Claim 166, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000261_0001
171. The compound of Claim 166, wherein the compound of formula (XXVI) has the structure:
Figure imgf000261_0002
172. A compound of formula (XXVII):
Figure imgf000261_0003
wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl; R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-C]2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl alkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfϊnylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphoryl alkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of — C(=O)OR6> -C(=O)SRe, - CC=O)NR6R6 and -C(=O)Z; each R6 can be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Q- C24 alkyl, acyl, alkylacyl, arylacyl, aryl, arylalkyl, p-nitrophenyl3 pentafluorophenyl, pentafluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl, trichloroethyl, and heteroaryl;
Z can be a halogen; and with the provisio the compound of formula (XXVII) cannot have the structure and stereochemistry of a compound of formula (XXVII-A):
Figure imgf000262_0001
(XXVII-A) where R3 is methyl; R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl, R5 is -CC=O)OR6, and R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or t-butyl.
173. The compound of Claim 172, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000263_0001
(XXVII -A) with the provisio that when R3 is methyl; R5 is -Ct=O)OR6; and R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or t-butyl, then R4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl. 174. The compound of Claim 172, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000263_0002
(XXVII -B).
175. The compound of Claim 172, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000263_0003
(XXVII -IA) with the proviso Rs is not -Q=O)ORe, wherein Rδ is hydrogen, methyl or t-butyl.
176. The compound of Claim 172, wherein the compound of formula (XXVII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000264_0001
(XXVII -IB). 177. A compound of formula (XXVIII):
Figure imgf000264_0002
wherein:
R3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C]-O alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3-6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: Ci-Cj2 alkyl, C2-Ci2 alkenyl, C2-Q2 alkynyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkyl, C3-Ci2 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-Cn heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoaikyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfϊnylalkyl, alkoxysulfmylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl;
PG3 is a protecting group moiety; and with the proviso that the compound of formula (XXVIII) cannot have the structure and stereochemistry of a compound of formula (XXVIII-A):
Figure imgf000265_0001
where R3 is methyl; R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl; and PG3 is -Cf=O)CH2CHa or mesylate.
178. The compound of Claim 177, wherein the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000265_0002
(XXVIII -A) with the proviso that if R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl and R3 is methyl then PG3 cannot be -C(^O)CHaCHs or mesylate.
179. The compound of Claim 177, wherein the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000266_0001
(XXVIII -B).
180. The compound of Claim 177, wherein the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000266_0002
181. The compound of Claim 177, wherein the compound of formula (XXVIII) has the structure:
Figure imgf000266_0003
(xxvill -IB). 182. A compound of formula (XV) :
Figure imgf000267_0001
wherein:
R-3 is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1^ alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C3.6 cycloalkenyl, aryl, and arylalkyl;
R4 can be selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted variants of the following: C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-Ci2 alkynyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkenyl, C3-C12 cycloalkynyl, C3-Ci2 heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (heterocyclyl)alkyl, acyl, acylalkyl, alkyloxycarbonyloxy, carbonylacyl, aminocarbonyl, azido, azidoalkyl, aminoalkyl, salt of an aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, salt of carboxyalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, salt of an alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, salt of a dialkylaminoalkyl, phenyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, carboxy, cyano, alkanesulfonylalkyl, alkanesulfinylalkyl, alkoxysulfinylalkyl, thiocyanoalkyl, boronic acidalkyl, boronic esteralkyl, guanidinoalkyl, salt of a guanidinoalkyl, sulfoalkyl, salt of a sulfoalkyl, alkoxysulfonylalkyl, sulfooxyalkyl, salt of a sulfooxyalkyl, alkoxysulfonyloxyalkyl, phosphonooxyalkyl, salt of a phosphonooxyalkyl, (alkylphosphooxy)alkyl, phosphorylalkyl, salt of a phosphorylalkyl, (alkylphosphoryl)alkyl, pyridinylalkyl, salt of a pyridinylalkyl, salt of a heteroarylalkyl and halogenated alkyl including polyhalogenated alkyl; and with the proviso that the compound of formula (XV) cannot have the structure and stereochemistry of a compound of formula (XV-A):
Figure imgf000268_0001
where R3 is methyl; and R4 is 2-cyclohexenyl; and with the proviso that the compound of formula (XV) cannot have the structure:
Figure imgf000268_0002
where R3 is methyl; and R4 is cyclohexyl, isopropyl or phenyl. 183. The compound of Claim 182, wherein the compound of formula (XV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000268_0003
with the proviso that if R3 is methyl, then R4 cannot be 2-cyclohexenyl, cyclohexyl, isopropyl, or phenyl.
184. The compound of Claim 182, wherein the compound of formula (XV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000269_0001
with the proviso that if R3 is methyl, then R4 cannot be cyclohexyl, isopropyl, or phenyl.
185. The compound of Claim 182, wherein the compound of formula (XV) has the structure:
Figure imgf000269_0002
PCT/US2007/008562 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof WO2007117591A2 (en)

Priority Applications (11)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA002648317A CA2648317A1 (en) 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
JP2009504312A JP2009532484A (en) 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 Total synthesis of salinosporamide A and its analogs
AU2007235323A AU2007235323C1 (en) 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 Total synthesis of salinosporamide A and analogs thereof
BRPI0709474-4A BRPI0709474A2 (en) 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 total synthesis of salinosporamide a and its analogues
EP07754986A EP2013167B1 (en) 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
CN2007800188644A CN101460457B (en) 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
NZ572026A NZ572026A (en) 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
MX2008012847A MX2008012847A (en) 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof.
IL194507A IL194507A0 (en) 2006-04-06 2008-10-02 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
ZA2008/09305A ZA200809305B (en) 2006-04-06 2008-10-30 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
HK09105747.6A HK1128279A1 (en) 2006-04-06 2009-06-26 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US79016806P 2006-04-06 2006-04-06
US60/790,168 2006-04-06
US81696806P 2006-06-27 2006-06-27
US60/816,968 2006-06-27
US83615506P 2006-08-07 2006-08-07
US60/836,155 2006-08-07
US84413206P 2006-09-12 2006-09-12
US60/844,132 2006-09-12
US88537907P 2007-01-17 2007-01-17
US60/885,379 2007-01-17

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007117591A2 true WO2007117591A2 (en) 2007-10-18
WO2007117591A3 WO2007117591A3 (en) 2008-05-08
WO2007117591A9 WO2007117591A9 (en) 2008-10-02

Family

ID=38529634

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2007/008562 WO2007117591A2 (en) 2006-04-06 2007-04-06 Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof

Country Status (15)

Country Link
US (2) US7842814B2 (en)
EP (2) EP2631237A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2009532484A (en)
KR (1) KR20080109071A (en)
CN (2) CN101460457B (en)
AU (1) AU2007235323C1 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0709474A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2648317A1 (en)
CO (1) CO6220977A2 (en)
HK (1) HK1128279A1 (en)
IL (1) IL194507A0 (en)
MX (1) MX2008012847A (en)
NZ (2) NZ596653A (en)
WO (1) WO2007117591A2 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200809305B (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009134531A3 (en) * 2008-03-07 2010-11-18 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
US8067616B2 (en) 2006-04-06 2011-11-29 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Total synthesis of salinosporamide A and analogs thereof

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7176232B2 (en) 2002-06-24 2007-02-13 The Regents Of The University Of California Salinosporamides and methods for use thereof
EP1638552B1 (en) 2003-06-20 2011-03-02 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Use of (3.2.0) heterocyclic compounds and analogs thereof for the treatment of cancer
ZA200600473B (en) * 2003-06-20 2007-04-25 Univ California Salinosporamides and methods for use thereof
WO2006060676A1 (en) 2004-12-03 2006-06-08 Dana Farber Cancer Institute Compositions and methods for treating neoplastic diseases
US8394816B2 (en) * 2007-12-07 2013-03-12 Irene Ghobrial Methods of using [3.2.0] heterocyclic compounds and analogs thereof in treating Waldenstrom's Macroglobulinemia
WO2009140287A1 (en) 2008-05-12 2009-11-19 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Salinosporamide derivatives as proteasome inhibitors
WO2012135528A2 (en) 2011-03-29 2012-10-04 Texas Tech University System Galectin-3c combination therapy for human cancer
JP2019524894A (en) 2016-08-19 2019-09-05 セルジーン インターナショナル ツー エスアーエールエル The morphic form of marizomib and its use

Family Cites Families (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6335358B1 (en) 1995-04-12 2002-01-01 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Lactacystin analogs
US5874443A (en) 1995-10-19 1999-02-23 Trega Biosciences, Inc. Isoquinoline derivatives and isoquinoline combinatorial libraries
US5886210A (en) 1996-08-22 1999-03-23 Rohm And Haas Company Method for preparing aromatic compounds
US5922683A (en) 1997-05-29 1999-07-13 Abbott Laboratories Multicyclic erythromycin derivatives
WO1999009006A1 (en) 1997-08-15 1999-02-25 Soucy Francois SYNTHESIS OF CLASTO-LACTACYSTIN β-LACTONE AND ANALOGS THEREOF
JP2001517631A (en) 1997-09-25 2001-10-09 ミレニアム・ファーマシューティカルズ・インコーポレイテッド Proteasome inhibitors, ubiquitin pathway inhibitors, or agents that interfere with NF-κB activation via the ubiquitin proteasome pathway for treating inflammatory and autoimmune diseases
ES2402104T3 (en) 1997-11-21 2013-04-29 Purdue Neuroscience Company Use of substituted 2-aminoacetamides for the treatment or relief of anxiety
CA2326166A1 (en) 1998-03-26 1999-10-07 Shionogi & Co., Ltd. Indole derivatives with antiviral activity
US6509331B1 (en) 1998-06-22 2003-01-21 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Deoxyamino acid compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
FR2784988B1 (en) 1998-10-23 2002-09-20 Adir NOVEL DIHYDRO AND TETRAHYDROQUINOLEINIC COMPOUNDS, PROCESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION AND THE PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
AU2002243228B2 (en) * 2000-11-16 2007-08-02 The Regents Of The University Of California Marine actinomycete taxon for drug and fermentation product discovery
US7176232B2 (en) 2002-06-24 2007-02-13 The Regents Of The University Of California Salinosporamides and methods for use thereof
US7179834B2 (en) 2002-06-24 2007-02-20 The Regents Of The University Of California Salinosporamides and methods for use thereof
IN228043B (en) 2003-02-14 2009-02-13 Intermed Discovery Gmbh
EP1638552B1 (en) * 2003-06-20 2011-03-02 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Use of (3.2.0) heterocyclic compounds and analogs thereof for the treatment of cancer
US7371875B2 (en) 2004-03-12 2008-05-13 Miikana Therapeutics, Inc. Cytotoxic agents and methods of use
WO2005099687A2 (en) * 2004-04-09 2005-10-27 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Analogs of salinosporamide a
US7183417B2 (en) 2004-04-09 2007-02-27 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Simple stereocontrolled synthesis of salinosporamide A
US20060264495A1 (en) 2004-04-30 2006-11-23 Michael Palladino Methods of using [3.2.0] heterocyclic compounds and analogs thereof
AU2005283141B2 (en) * 2004-04-30 2012-05-10 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. (3.2.0) heterocyclic compounds and methods of using the same
US7579371B2 (en) 2004-04-30 2009-08-25 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of using [3.2.0] heterocyclic compounds and analogs thereof
BRPI0513262A (en) * 2004-07-12 2008-04-29 Bayer Cropscience Ag substituted heterocycles
WO2006060676A1 (en) 2004-12-03 2006-06-08 Dana Farber Cancer Institute Compositions and methods for treating neoplastic diseases
CA2590334A1 (en) 2004-12-03 2006-06-08 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of using [3.2.0] heterocyclic compounds and analogs thereof
WO2006118973A2 (en) 2005-04-29 2006-11-09 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of using heterobyclic compounds for treatment of rectal cancer
US20060287520A1 (en) * 2005-05-16 2006-12-21 Danishefsky Samuel J Synthesis of salinosporamide A and analogues thereof
EP1931679A4 (en) 2005-08-10 2009-07-29 Harvard College Analogs of salinosporamide a
US7691896B2 (en) * 2005-08-10 2010-04-06 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Analogs of salinosporamide A
US7465720B2 (en) 2005-09-12 2008-12-16 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Proteasome inhibiting β-lactam compounds
US7759327B2 (en) * 2006-01-06 2010-07-20 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Compositions containing zinc salts for coating medical articles
EP2631237A2 (en) 2006-04-06 2013-08-28 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Total synthesis of salinosporamide A and analogs thereof
JP2011514352A (en) * 2008-03-07 2011-05-06 ネレアス ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Total synthesis of salinosporamide A and its analogs
WO2009140287A1 (en) * 2008-05-12 2009-11-19 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Salinosporamide derivatives as proteasome inhibitors
US11826005B2 (en) 2022-03-29 2023-11-28 Midea Group Co., Ltd. Exhibiting a dishwasher rack to the user

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
A. ENDO ET AL., JACS, vol. 127, no. 23, 2005, pages 8298 - 8299

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8067616B2 (en) 2006-04-06 2011-11-29 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Total synthesis of salinosporamide A and analogs thereof
WO2009134531A3 (en) * 2008-03-07 2010-11-18 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
JP2011514352A (en) * 2008-03-07 2011-05-06 ネレアス ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Total synthesis of salinosporamide A and its analogs
US8003802B2 (en) 2008-03-07 2011-08-23 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Total synthesis of Salinosporamide A and analogs thereof
US8314251B2 (en) 2008-03-07 2012-11-20 Nereus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Total synthesis of salinosporamide A and analogs thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2013167A2 (en) 2009-01-14
AU2007235323C1 (en) 2012-05-10
US20070249693A1 (en) 2007-10-25
KR20080109071A (en) 2008-12-16
CN102718776A (en) 2012-10-10
WO2007117591A3 (en) 2008-05-08
CO6220977A2 (en) 2010-11-19
EP2013167B1 (en) 2012-09-05
AU2007235323A1 (en) 2007-10-18
ZA200809305B (en) 2011-10-26
WO2007117591A9 (en) 2008-10-02
NZ596653A (en) 2012-10-26
CN101460457A (en) 2009-06-17
US7842814B2 (en) 2010-11-30
BRPI0709474A2 (en) 2011-07-12
US8067616B2 (en) 2011-11-29
EP2631237A2 (en) 2013-08-28
MX2008012847A (en) 2008-10-13
US20110105762A1 (en) 2011-05-05
AU2007235323B2 (en) 2011-09-08
JP2009532484A (en) 2009-09-10
CA2648317A1 (en) 2007-10-18
CN101460457B (en) 2012-07-18
NZ572026A (en) 2011-12-22
HK1128279A1 (en) 2009-10-23
IL194507A0 (en) 2009-08-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2013167B1 (en) Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
US8314251B2 (en) Total synthesis of salinosporamide A and analogs thereof
ES2886442T3 (en) Amino acid derivative prodrug
US20040127727A1 (en) Method of preparing (3R, 3aS, 6aR) -3-hydroxyhexahydrofuro [2,3,-b] furan and related compounds
Nocquet et al. Synthesis of spirocyclopropyl γ-lactams by tandem intramolecular azetidine ring-opening/closing cascade reaction: synthetic and mechanistic aspects
AU2011250836A1 (en) Total synthesis of salinosporamide a and analogs thereof
CA2838036A1 (en) Tricyclic antibiotics
EP1930321A1 (en) Process for preparation of tetrasubstituted 5-azaspiro[2.4]- heptane derivatives and optically active intermediates thereof
Acherki et al. Enantioselective synthesis of (+)-(2S, 4S, 6S)-1-ethoxycarbonyl-6-hydroxymethyl-4-methylpipecolate
CZ20022683A3 (en) Synthesis process of intermediate for ecteinascidine and phthalascidine
Raghavan et al. Toward a stereoselective synthesis of tetrahydroxy long chain base (LCB) and the synthesis of analogs of mannostatin A
Himmelbauer Synthetic efforts towards a synthesis of the tetracyclic core of (-)-lemonomycin

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200780018864.4

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 07754986

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007235323

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 194507

Country of ref document: IL

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2648317

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/a/2008/012847

Country of ref document: MX

Ref document number: 2009504312

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 572026

Country of ref document: NZ

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2007235323

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20070406

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 08115223

Country of ref document: CO

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007754986

Country of ref document: EP

Ref document number: 1020087027066

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 9264/DELNP/2008

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008139648

Country of ref document: RU

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0709474

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20081006